advertisement
Brother Laser Printer
HL-1260e/HL-1660
USER’S GUIDE
I
II
Trademarks
Brother is a registered trademark of Brother Industries, Ltd.
Apple and LaserWriter are registered trademarks, and TrueType is a trademark of
Apple Computer, Inc.
Centronics is a trademark of Genicom Corporation.
EPSON is a registered trademark, and FX-850 and FX-80 are trademarks of Seiko
Epson Corporation.
Hewlett-Packard, HP and PCL are registered trademarks, and HP LaserJet 4+, HP
LaserJet Plus, HP LaserJet II, HP LaserJet IID, HP LaserJet IIID, HP-GL, HP-
GL/2, and Bi-Tronics are trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Company.
IBM, Proprinter XL, Proprinter, and IBM/PC are registered trademarks of
International Business Machines Corporation.
Intellifont is a registered trademark of AGFA Corporation, a division of Miles, Inc.
Microsoft and MS-DOS are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.
PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
All other brand and product names mentioned in this user’s guide are registered trademarks or trademarks of respective companies.
Compilation and Publication
Under the supervision of Brother Industries Ltd., this manual has been compiled and published, covering the latest product descriptions and specifications.
The contents of this manual and the specifications of this product are subject to change without notice.
Brother reserves the right to make changes without notice in the specifications and materials contained herein and shall not be responsible for any damages (including consequential) caused by reliance on the materials presented, including but not limited to typographical and other errors relating to the publication.
©1996 Brother Industries Ltd.
Shipment of the Printer
If for any reason you must ship your Printer, carefully package the Printer to avoid any damage during transit. It is recommended that you save and use the original packaging. The
Printer should also be adequately insured with the carrier.
WARNING
When shipping the Printer, the TONER CARTRIDGE must be removed from the Printer.
Failure to remove the Toner Cartridge during shipping will cause severe damage to the
Printer and will VOID THE WARRANTY.
Laser Printer
HL-1260e/HL-1660
USER’S GUIDE
(For USA & CANADA Only)
For technical and operational assistance, please call:
In USA 1-800-276-7746
714-859-9700 Ext. 329
In CANADA 1-800-853-6660
514-685-6464
(outside California)
(within California)
(within Montreal)
If you have comments or suggestions, please write us at:
In USA
In CANADA
Printer Customer Support
Brother International Corporation
15 Musick
Irvine, CA 92718
Brother International Corporation (Canada), Ltd.
- Marketing Dept.
1, rue Hôtel de Ville
Dollard-des-Ormeaux, PQ, Canada H9B 3H6
BBS
For downloading drivers from our Bulletin Board Service, call:
In USA
In CANADA
1-714-859-2610
1-514-685-2040
Please log on to our BBS with your first name, last name and a four digit number for your password. Our BBS supports modem speeds up to 14,400, 8 bits no parity, 1 stop bit.
Fax-Back System (For USA only)
Brother Customer Service has installed an easy to use Fax-Back System so you can get instant answers to common technical questions and product information for all Brother products. This is available 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. You can use the system to send the information to any fax machine, not just the one you are calling from.
Please call 1-800-521-2846 and follow the voice prompts to receive faxed instructions on how to use the system and your index of Fax-Back subjects.
DEALERS/SERVICE CENTERS (USA only)
For the name of an authorized dealer or service center, call 1-800-284-4357.
SERVICE CENTERS (Canada only)
For service center addresses in Canada, call 1-800-853-6660
INTERNET ADDRESS
For technical questions and downloading drivers: http://www.brother.com i
ii
Definitions of Warnings, Cautions, and Notes
The following conventions are used in this User’s Guide:
Warning
Indicates warnings that must be observed to prevent possible personal injury.
Caution
Indicates cautions that must be observed to use the printer properly or prevent damage to the printer.
✒ Note
Indicates notes and useful tips to remember when using the printer.
To Use the Printer Safely
Warning
The fixing roller is extremely hot during operation. Remove the paper carefully.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
IMPORTANT INFORMATION: REGULATIONS ......................... ix
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL.............................................................. 1-1
ABOUT THIS MANUAL...................................................................... 1-1
ABOUT CHAPTERS ON THE FLOPPY DISK ................................... 1-3
ABOUT THIS PRINTER....................................................................... 1-4
CHAPTER 2 GETTING STARTED.............................................. 2-1
BEFORE USING THE PRINTER ......................................................... 2-1
Checking the Components................................................................ 2-1
Printer Carton.............................................................................. 2-1
Toner Cartridge ........................................................................... 2-2
Operating and Storage Environment ............................................... 2-4
Power Supply.............................................................................. 2-4
Environment ............................................................................... 2-4
SETTING UP THE PRINTER............................................................... 2-5
Opening and Closing the Printer ...................................................... 2-5
Removing the Protective Parts.......................................................... 2-6
Installing the Toner Cartridge........................................................... 2-7
Loading Paper in the Paper Cassette ................................................ 2-11
Connecting the Printer to Your Computer ........................................ 2-17
Turning the Printer On and Off ........................................................ 2-19
Plugging in the Power Cord ....................................................... 2-19
Pressing the POWER Switch ...................................................... 2-20
Printing the Test Patterns or Lists ..................................................... 2-21
Checking the Printed Test Pattern or Demo Page............................. 2-24
iii
USER’S GUIDE
CHAPTER 3 BEFORE WORKING WITH THE PRINTER ........... 3-1
SOFTWARE COMPATIBILITY............................................................ 3-1
AUTOMATIC EMULATION SELECTION.......................................... 3-3
AUTOMATIC INTERFACE SELECTION ........................................... 3-5
ABOUT THE CONTROL PANEL ........................................................ 3-7
Adjusting the Control Panel Angle ................................................... 3-7
Selecting the Local Language Display ............................................. 3-8
Using the Panel Switches ................................................................. 3-9
User Settings ............................................................................... 3-10
Factory Settings .......................................................................... 3-10
PAPER HANDLING.............................................................................. 3-11
Paper Size ................................................................................... 3-11
Using Envelopes ......................................................................... 3-13
Face Down Print Delivery ................................................................ 3-17
Face Up Print Delivery ..................................................................... 3-17
CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL................................................. 4-1
DISPLAY AND LAMPS........................................................................ 4-1
Printer Status Messages .............................................................. 4-2
READY....................................................................................... 4-4
DATA .......................................................................................... 4-4
ALARM...................................................................................... 4-4
ON LINE .................................................................................... 4-4
iv
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SWITCHES IN NORMAL MODE........................................................ 4-5
SET Switch...................................................................................... 4-6
▲ (UP) or ▼ (DOWN) Switch ........................................................ 4-6
MODE Switch ................................................................................. 4-7
MODE Switch Settings in HP LaserJet 4+,
EPSON FX-850, and IBM Proprinter XL Modes....................... 4-8
MODE Switch Settings in BR-Script Mode ............................... 4-11
MODE Switch Settings in HP-GL Mode.................................... 4-13
Basic Operation Procedures........................................................ 4-15
Operation Example: Selecting the Parallel Interface ................. 4-16
INTERFACE MODE .................................................................. 4-17
FORMAT MODE ....................................................................... 4-20
ORIENTATION ..................................................................... 4-20
AUTO MODE........................................................................ 4-21
PAGE FORMAT MODE........................................................ 4-22
GRAPHICS MODE ............................................................... 4-25
RESOLUTION MODE............................................................... 4-28
PAGE PROTECTION ................................................................. 4-31
CARD OPERATION .................................................................. 4-32
ADVANCED MODE .................................................................. 4-41
NETWORK MODE............................................................... 4-41
ERROR PRINT...................................................................... 4-44
CONTINUE MODE .............................................................. 4-44
BUZZER SETTING .............................................................. 4-45
SCALABLE FONT ............................................................... 4-45
PRINT DENSITY.................................................................. 4-46
INPUT BUFFER.................................................................... 4-46
SAVE SETTINGS.................................................................. 4-47
PAGE COUNTER....................................................................... 4-48
EXIT MODE .............................................................................. 4-48
FONT Switch................................................................................... 4-49
Setting the Font and Symbol Set in the HP LaserJet 4+ Mode ... 4-49
List of Fonts ................................................................................ 4-59
List of Symbol/Character Sets .................................................... 4-60
FORM FEED Switch (REPRINT Switch) ...................................... 4-61
Form Feed................................................................................... 4-61
Reprint Function ......................................................................... 4-61
CONTINUE Switch ....................................................................... 4-63
v
USER’S GUIDE
SWITCHES IN SHIFT MODE.............................................................. 4-64
SHIFT Switch ................................................................................. 4-64
EMULATION Switch ..................................................................... 4-65
About Emulation Modes............................................................. 4-67
ECONOMY Switch......................................................................... 4-69
TONER SAVE MODE................................................................ 4-69
POWER SAVE MODE ............................................................... 4-69
FEEDER Switch.............................................................................. 4-70
FEEDER ..................................................................................... 4-70
MP FIRST................................................................................... 4-72
MANUAL FEED ........................................................................ 4-73
MP TRAY SETTING.................................................................. 4-73
MEDIA TYPE ............................................................................ 4-74
DUPLEX MODE........................................................................ 4-75
COPY Switch................................................................................... 4-77
RESET Switch................................................................................. 4-78
List of Factory Settings............................................................... 4-79
TEST Switch.................................................................................... 4-85
HEX DUMP MODE .............................................................................. 4-88
CHAPTER 5 OPTIONS ............................................................... 5-1
LOWER TRAY UNIT (LT-1200/LT-1600) ............................................ 5-1
Loading Paper from the Lower Paper Cassette ................................ 5-1
FONT CARTRIDGE/CARD, FLASH MEMORY/HDD CARD ........... 5-2
Installing a Font Cartridge/Card, Flash Memory Card and
Selecting the Optional Fonts ............................................................ 5-4
MODULAR I/O CARD ......................................................................... 5-6
RAM EXPANSION ............................................................................... 5-7
DUPLEX UNIT (DX-1200/DX-1600) .................................................. 5-11
vi
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER 6 MAINTENANCE..................................................... 6-1
MAINTENANCE................................................................................... 6-1
Toner Cartridge................................................................................. 6-1
Toner Empty Message ................................................................ 6-1
Replacing the Toner Cartridge .................................................... 6-2
Cleaning the Printer Exterior ...................................................... 6-5
Cleaning the Printer Interior ....................................................... 6-6
CHAPTER 7 TROUBLESHOOTING ............................................... 7-1
TROUBLESHOOTING ......................................................................... 7-1
Operator Call Messages.................................................................... 7-1
Error Messages ................................................................................. 7-3
Service Call Messages ...................................................................... 7-5
Possible Troubles.............................................................................. 7-6
Paper Jam.................................................................................... 7-6
Unsatisfactory Printouts.............................................................. 7-12
APPENDICES ............................................................................Appendix-1
PRINTER SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................... Appendix-1
PAPER SPECIFICATIONS.................................................................... Appendix-4
INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS .......................................................... Appendix-8
Bi-directional Parallel Interface........................................................ Appendix-8
Signal Description ...................................................................... Appendix-9
Parallel Cable Connection for IBM-PC/AT or
Compatible Computers and IBM-PS/2 Computers................... Appendix-10
vii
USER’S GUIDE
RS-232C Serial Interface................................................................ Appendix-11
Standard Specifications............................................................. Appendix-11
Interface Connectors ................................................................. Appendix-11
Pin Assignment ......................................................................... Appendix-11
Signal Description .................................................................... Appendix-12
Serial Cable Connection for IBM-PC/AT or
Compatible Computers and IBM-PS/2 Computers................... Appendix-13
SYMBOL/CHARACTER SETS.......................................................... Appendix-14
Symbol Sets Supported by the Printer’s Intellifont Compatible
Symbol Sets Supported by the Printer’s TrueType and Type 1
Font Compatible, and Original Typefaces ...................................... Appendix-34
QUICK REFERENCE OF COMMANDS ........................................... Appendix-36
PCL Command Sets.................................................................. Appendix-36
CCITT G3/G4 and TIFF ........................................................... Appendix-49
Horizontal 1200-dpi Image Format Mode ................................ Appendix-52
HP-GL/2 Command Sets .......................................................... Appendix-55
Printer Job Language Commands Syntax ................................. Appendix-57
EPSON FX-850 Mode.................................................................... Appendix-58
IBM Proprinter XL Mode............................................................... Appendix-61
Print Bar Codes or Expanded Characters.................................. Appendix-66
viii
REGULATIONS
IMPORTANT INFORMATION: REGULATIONS
Federal Communications Commission Compliance Notice
(For U.S.A. only)
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
– Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
– Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
– Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
– Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Important – About the Interface Cable
This printer has been certified to comply with FCC standards, which are applied to the U.S.A. only. A shielded interface cable should be used according to FCC 15.27(C). In addition, a grounded plug should be plugged into a grounded AC outlet after checking the rating of the local power supply for the printer to operate properly and safely.
☛ Caution
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Brother Industries,
Ltd. could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
International Energy Star Compliance Statement (For HL-1660 only)
The purpose of the International Energy Star Program is to promote the development and popularization of energy-efficient office equipments, which includes computers, monitors, printers, facsimile receivers and copy machines world-wide.
As an International Energy Star partner, Brother Industries, Ltd. has decided that this product meets the guideline of the program.
ix
x
USER’S GUIDE
Canadian Department of Communications Compliance
Statement (For Canada only)
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the interference- causing equipment standard entitled “Digital Apparatus”, ICES-003 of the
Department of Communications.
Avis de conformité aux normes du ministère des
Communications du Canada (Pour Canada Seul)
Cet appareil numérique respecte les limites de bruits radioélectriques applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe B prescrites dans la norme sur le matériel brouilleur : “Appareils Numériques”, NMB-003
édictée par le ministère des Communications.
Laser Safety (110-120 V model only)
This printer is certified as a Class I laser product under the U.S.
Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation
Performance Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health and
Safety Act of 1968. This means that the printer does not produce hazardous laser radiation.
Since radiation emitted inside the printer is completely confined within protective housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot escape from the machine during any phase of user operation.
CDRH Regulations (110-120 V model only)
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S.
Food and Drug Administration (FDA) implemented regulations for laser products on August 2, 1976. These regulations apply to laser products manufactured from August 1, 1976. Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States. The label shown on the back of the printer indicates compliance with the CDRH regulations and must be attached to laser products marketed in the United States.
MANUFACTURED:
BROTHER INDUSTRIES, LTD.
15-1 Naeshiro-cho Mizuho-ku Nagoya, 467 Japan
This product complies with FDA radiation performance standards, 21
CFR chapter 1 subchapter J.
REGULATIONS
☛ Caution: Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
Radio Interference(220-240 V model only)
This printer complies with EN55022(CISPR Publication 22)/Class B.
Before this product is used, ensure that you use a double-shielded interface cable with twisted-pair conductors and that it is marked
“IEEE1284 compliant”. The cable must not exceed 1.8 metres in length.
IEC 825 (220-240 V model only)
This printer is a Class 1 laser product as defined in IEC 825 specifications. The label shown below is attached in countries where required.
This printer has a Class 3B Laser Diode which emits invisible laser radiation in the Scanner Unit. The Scanner Unit should not be opened under any circumstances.
☛ Caution: Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
The following caution label is attached on the cover of the scanner unit.
xi
USER’S GUIDE
For Finland and Sweden
LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE
KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT
☛ Varoitus! Laitteen käyttäminen muulla kuin tässä käyttöohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saattaa altistaa käyttäjän turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittävälle näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle.
Varning – Om apparaten används på annat sätt än i denna Bruksanvisning specificerats, kan användaren utsättas för osynlig laserstrålning, som
överskrider gränsen för laserklass 1.
For Your Safety
To ensure safe operation the three-pin plug supplied must be inserted only into a standard three-pin power point which is effectively grounded through the normal household wiring.
Extension cords used with the equipment must be three-conductor and be correctly wired to provide connection to ground. Incorrectly wired extension cords are a major cause of fatalities.
The fact that the equipment operates satisfactorily does not imply that the power is grounded and that the installation is completely safe. For your safety, if in any doubt about the effective grounding of the power, consult a qualified electrician.
Wiring Information (For U.K. only)
Important
If the mains plug supplied with this printer is not suitable for your socket outlet, remove the plug from the mains cord and fit an appropriate three pin plug. If the replacement plug is intended to take a fuse then fit the same rating fuse as the original.
If a moulded plug is severed from the mains cord then it should be destroyed because a plug with cut wires is dangerous if engaged in a live socket outlet. Do not leave it where a child might find it!
In the event of replacing the plug fuse, fit a fuse approved by ASTA to
BS1362 with the same rating as the original fuse.
Always replace the fuse cover. Never use a plug with the cover omitted.
WARNING - THIS PRINTER MUST BE EARTHED xii
REGULATIONS
The wires in the mains cord are coloured in accordance with the following code :
GREEN AND YELLOW
BLUE
BROWN
: EARTH
: NEUTRAL
: LIVE
The colours of the wires in the mains lead of this printer may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug.
If you need to fit a different plug, proceed as follows.
Remove a length of the cord outer sheath, taking care not to damage the coloured insulation of the wires inside.
Cut each of the three wires to the appropriate length. If the construction of the plug permits, leave the green and yellow wire longer than the others so that, in the event that the cord is pulled out of the plug, the green and yellow wire will be the last to disconnect.
Remove a short section of the coloured insulation to expose the wires.
The wire which is coloured green and yellow must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked with the letter “E” or by the safety earth symbol , or coloured green or green and yellow.
The wire which is coloured blue must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter “N” or coloured black or blue.
The wire which is coloured brown must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter “L” or coloured red or brown.
The outer sheath of the cord must be secured inside the plug. The coloured wires should not hang out of the plug.
xiii
USER’S GUIDE
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY (EUROPE)
We, Brother International Europe Ltd.,
Brother House 1 tame Street, Guide Bridge,
Audenshaw, Manchester M34 5JE, UK.
declare that this product is in conformity with the following normative documents:
Safety:
EMC:
EN 60950, EN 60825
EN 55022 Class B, EN 50082-1 following the provisions of the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC and the
Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 89/336/EEC (as amended by
91/263/EEC and 92/31/EEC).
Manufacture at the following facilities is carried out under a Quality
System which is registered by BSI Quality Assurance and JQA Quality
Assurance.
Brother Industries, Ltd., Kariya Plant
1-5, Kitajizoyama, Noda-cho, Kariya-shi,
Aichi-ken 448, Japan.
BSI Certificate of Registration No. FM27391
JQA Certificate of Registration No. 0340
Issued by:
Brother International Europe Ltd.
European Development and Technical Services Division xiv
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL
CHAPTER 1
GENERAL
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
This manual acts as your guide to the setup and operation of your printer and covers the following topics:
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL provides an overview of the printer. Read this
chapter first to get familiar with the printer.
CHAPTER 2 GETTING STARTED gives you general information about
this printer. Be sure to read this chapter before you use the printer.
CHAPTER 3 BEFORE WORKING WITH THE PRINTER gives you
important information on the printer setup to work with your computer and software. Be sure to read this chapter before you work with the printer.
CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL details the functions of the panel
switches and lamps. (Disk)
CHAPTER 5 OPTIONS describes the optional accessories for this
printer. (Disk)
CHAPTER 6 MAINTENANCE provides guidance on how to maintain
your printer (Disk)
CHAPTER 7 TROUBLESHOOTING helps you troubleshoot the printer
in case of problems.
APPENDICES contain detailed technical information on the printer as
well as the character sets and a quick reference guide to the printer control commands. (Disk)
INDEX provides an alphabetical list of the contents of this manual and the
floppy disk supplied with the printer.
1–1
USER’S GUIDE
✒ Notes
When you read this user’s guide, note the following:
• Chapters 4, 5, 6 and the Appendices of this User’s Guide are on the floppy disk provided with this printer. Read ABOUT CHAPTERS ON
THE FLOPPY DISK (See page 1-3 ) carefully before you print out the
additional chapters included on the floppy disk.
• This user’s guide contains instructions or steps to teach you various operations of the printer. Remember that the instructions start with the factory settings, particularly in Chapter 2 and Chapter 3. If you change the settings, particularly the emulation mode, the display messages change accordingly.
• The paper size has been factory set to letter or A4, depending upon the final destination of the printer. Some display messages appear differently in accordance with this setting.
1–2
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL
ABOUT CHAPTERS ON THE FLOPPY DISK
■ The floppy disk provided with this printer contains Chapters 4, 5, 6, and the Appendices of this User’s Guide. Follow the steps below to install and print out the sections you need to see.
1. Set up your printer referring to CHAPTER 2 GETTING STARTED.
2. Start your computer and MS-DOS
®
or Windows 95 / Windows 3.1.
3. Insert the printer User’s Guide floppy disk into the floppy disk drive A of your computer. It is assumed that A: is your floppy disk drive in this description.
4. Install the Disk Manual into your computer.
(for DOS user)
Type A:\INSTALL and press ENTER key.
Follow the messages on the screen.
(for Windows 95 user)
Click Start and choose Run.
Type A:\SETUP and press the ENTER key.
(for Windows 3.1 user)
Choose the RUN command from the FILE menu in the Program
Manager.
Type A:\SETUP and press the ENTER key.
■ Once you installed the Disk Manual into your computer, follow the steps below to print out the sections you need to see.
Print chapters from the Disk Manual.
(for DOS user)
Type HL1260e or HL1660 and press ENTER key. You do not need to choose disk drive nor directory. Follow the messages on the screen.
(for Windows 95 user) the e or HL1660 Series folder on the screen, and then the Disk Manual icon. Follow the messages on the screen.
(for Windows 3.1 user) the e or HL1660 group icon (sign on the screen) and then the Disk Manual icon. Follow the messages on the screen.
✒ Notes
• You will need a minimum of 6 MB free area on your hard disk drive in order to print any sections of the User's Guide.
• Use A4 or letter size paper for printing.
1–3
USER’S GUIDE
ABOUT THIS PRINTER
Features
This printer has the following standard features. When you need more information on how to use a particular feature, turn to the page indicated at the end of the paragraph.
High Speed and Quiet Laser Printing
This printer uses electrophotography technology by laser beam scanning so that it can print at a speed of 12 pages per minute. The controller utilizes a high speed 32-bit RISC microprocessor and special hardware chips. The quiet printing will not bother you working in your office or at home: max.
49 dB A (printing)/40 dB A (stand-by).
600 DPI Resolution
This printer uses a print engine with a resolution of 600 dots per inch (dpi).
Compared with a 300-dpi engine, the quality of the output is far superior.
See page 4-28. By utilizing the 300-dpi mode, the printer can also print
300-dpi data, if necessary. (In HP emulation you can select a horizontal
1200-dpi mode by special control command. See page
High Resolution Control
The high resolution control (HRC) technology provides clear and crisp
printouts and improves even the 600-dpi resolution. See 4-30 .
Maintenance-Free Toner Cartridge
The toner cartridge can print up to 6,000 single-sided pages. The one piece, easy-to-replace toner cartridge does not require difficult maintenance. Just
Advanced Photoscale Technology
This printer can print graphics in 256 shades of gray in HP ® LaserJet 4+™ emulation and BR-Script level 2, producing nearly photographic quality.
1–4
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL
Universal Paper Cassette and Manual Loading
This printer loads paper automatically from the paper cassette. Since the paper cassette is a universal type, a number of different sizes of paper can be used. Even envelopes can be loaded from the multi-purpose tray and the upper paper cassette. In addition, the multi-purpose tray allows you to load
paper sheet by sheet. See 3-15
for auto loading and 3-16 for manual
loading.
Three Interfaces
This printer has a high speed bi-directional parallel interface, an RS-232C serial interface, and a modular input/output (MIO) compatible interface.
If your application software supports the bi-directional parallel interface, you can monitor the printer status. It is fully compatible with the
industry-standard bi-directional parallel interface. See page 2-17 .
The RS-232C serial interface is an industry standard so that you can
connect it to any computer using a standard serial cable. See page 2-17 .
The MIO interface allows you to install a commercial MIO-compatible card. If you install the card, you can use one more interface port for features
such as networking or printer sharing. See page 5-6 .
Automatic Interface Selection
This printer can automatically select the bi-directional parallel, RS-232C serial, or MIO interface depending on the interface port through which it receives data. With this feature, the printer can be connected to more than
Five Emulation Modes
This printer can emulate the Hewlett-Packard
®
laser printer-LaserJet 4+
(PCL ® 5e), PostScript ® Level 2 language emulation (Brother BR-Script
Level 2) printers, the industry-standard HP-GL™ plotter as well as
EPSON
®
FX-850™, and IBM
®
Proprinter XL
®
printers. You can print with all application programs that support one of these printers. See page
1–5
USER’S GUIDE
Automatic Emulation Selection
This printer can automatically select the printer emulation mode depending on the print commands it receives from the computer software. With this
feature, many users can share the printer on a network. See page 3-3 .
Data Compression Technology
This printer can internally compress the received graphics and font data in its memory so that it can print larger graphics and more fonts without additional memory.
Memory Expansion
This printer has 2-Mbyte or 4-Mbyte of RAM as standard. It can be expanded up to 66 Mbytes. The memory should be expanded to 6 Mbytes in total or more to enjoy 600-dpi or APT printouts in the BR-Script 2 mode.
When you select duplex mode with an optional duplex unit installed, the memory should be expanded to 10Mbytes in total or more to enjoy 600-dpi
duplex printing. See pages 4-28 and
5-7 . (The standard memory fitted can
vary depending on the printer model and country.)
75 Scalable and 12 Bitmapped Fonts
This printer has the following scalable fonts and bitmapped fonts. The fonts that can be used vary according to the current emulation mode.
■ HP LaserJet 4+, EPSON FX-850, and IBM Proprinter XL Modes See printed Appendix after Chapter 7.
Scalable Fonts:
Intellifont Compatible Fonts:
• Alaska, Extrabold
• Antique Oakland, Oblique, Bold
• Brougham, Oblique, Bold, BoldOblique
• Cleveland Condensed
• Connecticut
• Guatemala Antique, Italic, Bold, BoldItalic
• Letter Gothic, Oblique, Bold
• Maryland
• Oklahoma, Oblique, Bold, BoldOblique
• PC Brussels Light, LightItalic, Demi, DemiItalic
• PC Tennessee Roman, Italic, Bold, BoldItalic
• Utah, Oblique, Bold, BoldOblique
• Utah Condensed, Oblique, Bold, BoldOblique
1–6
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL
Microsoft ® Windows ® 3.1 / Windows 95 TrueType™
Compatible Fonts:
• BR Symbol
• Helsinki, Oblique, Bold, BoldOblique
• Tennessee Roman, Italic, Bold, BoldItalic
• W Dingbats
Type 1 Font Compatible Fonts:
• Atlanta Book, BookOblique, Demi, DemiOblique
• Calgary MediumItalic
• Copenhagen Roman, Italic, Bold, BoldItalic
• Portugal Roman, Italic, Bold, BoldItalic
Brother Original Fonts:
• Bermuda Script
• Germany
• San Diego
• US Roman
Bitmapped Fonts (Portrait and Landscape):
• LetterGothic16.66 Medium, Italic, Bold, BoldItalic
• OCR-A
• OCR-B
■ BR-Script 2 Mode
Scalable Fonts:
• Atlanta Book, BookOblique, Demi, DemiOblique
• Alaska , Extrabold
• Antique Oakland, Oblique, Bold
• Bermuda Script
• BR Dingbats
• BR Symbol
• Brougham, Oblique, Bold, BoldOblique
• Brussels Light, LightItalic, Demi, DemiItalic
• Calgary MediumItalic
• Cleveland Condensed
• Connecticut
• Copenhagen Roman, Italic, Bold, BoldItalic
• Germany
• Guatemala Antique, Italic, Bold, BoldItalic
• Helsinki, Oblique, Bold, BoldOblique
• Helsinki Narrow, Oblique, Bold, BoldOblique
• Letter Gothic, Oblique, Bold
• Maryland
• Oklahoma, Oblique, Bold, Bold Oblique
• Portugal Roman, Italic, Bold, BoldItalic
• San Diego
• Tennessee Roman, Italic, Bold, BoldItalic
• US Roman
• Utah, Oblique, Bold, BoldOblique
• Utah Condensed, Oblique, Bold, BoldOblique
1–7
USER’S GUIDE
High Speed Printing with Microsoft Windows 95 / Windows 3.1
Since TrueType compatible fonts are resident in this printer, the printer can print them with Microsoft Windows 95 / Windows version 3.1 at a high speed without downloading them. Because the printer has a TrueType Font rasterizer, it can rasterize fonts at a high speed.
Bar Code Print
This printer can print the following 11 types of bar codes:
• Code 39 • UPC-E
• Interleaved 2 of 5 • Codabar
• EAN-8 • US-PostNet
• EAN-13 • ISBN
• UPC-A • Code 128
• EAN-128
CCITT G3/G4
Since this printer supports the CCITT G3/G4 format in addition to HPcompatible formats, it can quickly receive and print data compressed in this format.
Lock Panel
If the panel switch settings have been changed, the printer may not work as you expect. You can lock your settings to prevent changes from being
Power Save Mode
This printer has a power saving mode. As laser printers consume power to keep the fixing assembly at a high temperature, this feature can save electricity when the printer is on but not being used. The factory setting of the Power Save mode is ON that complies with EPA Energy Star new specification. Compared with conventional laser printers, this printer consumes less power even when the power saving mode is turned off. See
Toner Save Mode
This printer has an economical toner save mode. You can cut your printer running cost substantially by using this mode in addition to the improved
life expectancy of the toner cartridge. See page 4-69 .
1–8
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL
Reprint Function
You can reprint the last page printed with a touch of a panel switch which allows reprinting without sending the data again from the computer. See
Flash Memory Card and HDD Card
You can store fonts, macros, logos, and other print data in a commercial
PCMCIA-compatible flash memory card or HDD card that is installed in the upper card slot of this printer. See pages
Saving User Settings
You can operate the printer differently from other users with your own
panel switch settings. Two sets of user settings can be stored. See page 4-
1–9
USER’S GUIDE
Options
The following options are available for this printer:
Lower Tray Unit
A lower tray unit expands the paper source capacity. You can load extra paper and switch between the upper and lower paper sources automatically.
Duplex Unit
A duplex unit enables you to print on both sides of the paper. See page 5-
Technical Reference Manual
The technical reference manual contains detailed information about the printer control commands. For programming with the printer, see this manual which is available from your Brother dealer.
The following commercial products can be installed into this printer:
MIO Card
A commercial modular input/output (MIO) compatible sharing/network card gives you an additional interface port for attaching the printer to a
network or sharing your printer with multiple computers. See page 5-6 .
Font Cartridges
Commercial font cartridges containing additional scalable fonts or
bitmapped fonts. See page 5-2 .
Flash Memory Card and HDD Card
A commercial flash memory card or a HDD card can be installed. You can store fonts, macros, logos, and other print data in a commercial PCMCIAcompatible flash memory card or HDD card. See pages
RAM Expansion
Installing commercial memory modules expands the memory capacity up
1–10
CHAPTER 2 GETTING STARTED
CHAPTER 2
GETTING STARTED
BEFORE USING THE PRINTER
Checking the Components
Printer Carton
When you unpack the printer, check to see that you have all of the following parts.
Power Cord
Printer
Upper Paper Cassette
(installed inside the printer)
User’s Guide Disk
Windows Driver/TrueType
Compatible Font Disk #1
Windows Driver/TrueType
Compatible Font Disk #2
Fig. 2-1 Components in the Printer Carton
User’s Guide
(this book)
✒ Note
An interface cable is not a standard accessory. Please purchase an appropriate cable according to the interface you intend to use. The power cord may differ slightly from this figure depending on the country where you purchased the printer.
2–1
USER’S GUIDE
Toner Cartridge
The toner cartridge is inside the toner cartridge carton.
!
Caution
The toner cartridge is packed inside a bag. Do not open it now. Open it immediately before you install the toner cartridge. The toner cartridge must not be exposed to light for a long time.
Fig. 2-2 Toner Cartridge
2–2
General View
Font/IC Card Slot Control Panel
A
B
CHAPTER 2 GETTING STARTED
Top Cover
Face Down Print
Delivery Tray
Font Cartridge Slot
Rear Access Cover
Multi-purpose Tray
Upper Paper Cassette
Power Switch
Fig. 2-3 Front View
Adjustment Knob for
Face Up/Down Print Delivery
Bi-directional Parallel
Interface Connector
Power Cord Connector
RS-232C Serial
Interface Connector
MIO Card Slot
Modular Jack for Options
Fig. 2-4 Rear View
2–3
USER’S GUIDE
Operating and Storage Environment
Please take note of the following before using the printer.
Power Supply
Use the printer within the specified power range.
AC power: ±10% of the rated power voltage
Frequency: 50 Hz (220-240 V) or 60 Hz (110-120 V)
The power cord, including extensions, should not exceed 5 meters (16.5
feet).
Do not share the same power circuit with other high-power appliances, particularly an air conditioner, copier, shredder, etc. If it is unavoidable that you must use the printer with these appliances, we recommend you use a voltage transformer or a high-frequency noise filter.
Use a voltage regulator if the power source is not stable.
Environment
Use the printer only within the following ranges of temperature and humidity.
Ambient temperature: 10°C to 32.5°C (50°F to 90.5°F)
Ambient humidity: 20% to 80% (without condensation)
Do not block the air exit on top of the printer. Do not place objects on top of the printer, especially on the air exit.
Ventilate the room where you use the printer.
Do not place the printer where it is exposed to direct sunlight. Use a blind or a heavy curtain to protect the printer from direct sunlight if the printer is unavoidably set up near a window.
Do not install the printer near devices that contain magnets or generate magnetic fields.
Do not subject the printer to strong physical shocks or vibrations. Do not expose the printer to open flames or salty or corrosive gasses.
Place the printer on a flat, horizontal surface.
Keep the printer clean. Do not install the printer in a dusty place.
Do not install the printer near an air conditioner.
2–4
CHAPTER 2 GETTING STARTED
SETTING UP THE PRINTER
Opening and Closing the Printer
To install the toner cartridge or to access the paper path, you need to open the top cover of the printer. Remember the following steps to open and close the printer.
■ To open the printer, hold both sides of the top cover and raise it upwards until it latches.
Fig. 2-5 Opening the Top Cover
■ To close the printer, lower the top cover and push both sides gently until it latches.
Fig. 2-6 Closing the Top Cover
2–5
USER’S GUIDE
Removing the Protective Parts
After checking that you have all of the correct parts, temporarily place the printer where you can easily reach all sides. Remove the protective parts that secure the printer against damage during transportation, as shown below:
✒ Note
Keep all packing materials for transporting or storing the printer later.
1. Open the top cover and the upper paper cassette.
2. Remove the protective parts from inside the printer and the cassette.
3. Remove both spacers from the fixing roller.
Protective Parts
2–6
Fig. 2-7 Removing the Protective Parts
Spacers
Fig. 2-7 Removing the Protective Parts Fig. 2-8 Removing the Spacers
CHAPTER 2 GETTING STARTED
Installing the Toner Cartridge
This printer uses a toner cartridge to print. You have one toner cartridge as standard. A new cartridge contains enough toner to print approximately
6,000 A4 or letter-size single-sided pages at about 5% coverage (if the print density is set at level 8).
If you turn on the printer without the toner cartridge installed, the display shows the following operator call message to prompt you to install the toner cartridge.
14 NO CARTRIDGE
To install the toner cartridge, follow these steps:
1. Open the top cover of the printer.
2. Open the bag to unpack the toner cartridge.
!
Caution
•
•
•
•
Do not expose the toner cartridge to direct light.
Do not stand the toner cartridge on its end or turn it up-side down.
Do not touch the shaded parts shown below.
Do not open the drum shutter otherwise the toner or drum is adversely affected and might cause serious damage when printing.
Drum Shutter
Fig. 2-9 Don’ts When Handling the Toner Cartridge
2–7
USER’S GUIDE
3. Hold the toner cartridge with both hands. Rock it gently several times at a 45° angle. This distributes the toner evenly inside the cartridge.
Fig. 2-10 Rocking the Toner Cartridge
4. Bend the tab up and down several times until it is detached from the toner cartridge.
45°
45°
Fig. 2-11 Detaching the Tab
2–8
CHAPTER 2 GETTING STARTED
5. Hold the tab firmly and pull it out until the sealing tape comes out all the way.
Fig. 2-12 Pulling Out the Sealing Tape
!
Caution
If the tab breaks from the sealing tape, hold and pull out the tape. If your hands or clothes get dirty with toner, wipe or wash it off immediately with cold water.
6. Insert the toner cartridge in the direction of the arrows engraved on the cartridge into the side guides until it stops securely in the cartridge holder inside the printer.
✒ Note
Push both sides of the toner cartridge gently until the cartridge is seated in its place.
Fig. 2-13 Inserting the Toner Cartridge
2–9
USER’S GUIDE
7. Close the top cover of the printer.
When the cartridge has almost run out of toner, the display shows the following operator call message to prompt you to replace the toner cartridge.
16 TONER EMPTY
Although you can print several pages after the toner empty message appears, be sure to replace the toner cartridge with a new one before it becomes completely empty.
✒ Note
You can select the printer’s operation when the “Toner Empty” message is displayed with the MODE switch. The printer continues or stops printing.
For further information, see “Toner Low” in Chapter 4 .
For toner cartridge replacement, see “Toner Cartridge” in Chapter 6 .
2–10
CHAPTER 2 GETTING STARTED
Loading Paper in the Paper Cassette
The printer usually loads paper from the installed multi-purpose tray, upper cassette or optional lower paper cassette.
✒ Note
The lower tray unit is an option for this printer. This section refers to the upper paper cassette. For information about the lower paper cassette, see
“LOWER TRAY UNIT” in Chapter 5 .
Since the paper cassette is a universal type, you can set letter, A4, legal, ISO
B5, executive, A5, ISO B6, or A6 size cut sheet paper or COM10,
Monarch, C5, DL, or ISO B5 size envelopes in the paper cassette.
The paper sources have the following limitation. For more information about paper, see
paper source available size available type and capacity the multipurpose tray
(MP) cut sheet : letter, legal, A4, ISO
B5, Executive, A5, ISO
B6 and A6 envelope: COM 10, Monarch, C5,
DL and ISO B5 other size: wide 90-216mm
(3.5”-8.5”)
long 148-356mm
(5.8”-14”) plain paper : 150 envelope : 15
OHP film : 100 label stock : 100 other type : weight =
60 to 135 g/m
(16 to 36 lbs)
2 the upper paper cassette
(T1) the optional lower paper cassette (T2) cut sheet : letter, legal, A4, ISO
B5, Executive, A5, ISO
B6 and A6 envelope :COM 10, Monarch, C5,
DL and ISO B5 cut sheet : letter, legal, A4,
Executive plain paper : 500 weight =
60 to 105 g/m
(16 to 28 lbs) envelope : 40
2 plain paper : 500 weight =
60 to 90 g/m 2
(16 to 24 lbs) all sources for duplex printing (DX) cut sheet : letter, legal, A4, ISO
B5(except T2) and
Executive
* The capacity of T1 is reduced from the above specified capacities with the duplex unit installed.
2–11
USER’S GUIDE
Follow these steps to set paper and install the paper cassette:
✒ Note
Be sure to select the same paper size as the paper to be used from your application software, or correct printing cannot be obtained.
If your application software does not support paper size selection on its print menu, you can change the paper size with the MODE switch in the
FORMAT MODE. For paper size change, see “MODE Switch” in Chapter
4.
The paper size has been factory set to letter or A4, depending upon the final destination of the printer.
•110/120V model: Letter size paper set.
•220/240V model: A4 size paper set.
Load paper into the paper cassette as follows:
1. Pull the paper cassette out of the printer.
Fig. 2-14 Removing the Paper Cassette
2–12
CHAPTER 2 GETTING STARTED
2. Switch the adjustment lever on the back of the paper cassette according to the paper size shown below.
I.
II.
Backwards
Forwards
: letter, legal, A4, ISO B5, Executive and A5
: ISO B6, A6, COM10, Monarch, C5 and DL
Fig. 2-15 Switching the Adjustment lever by Paper Size
3. Set a side paper stop at right front corner inside the paper cassette by the paper size to be used so that 2 projectors of the side paper stop are inserted into the guide holes on the base of the paper cassette.
Letter and
Legal
A4
Executive
ISO B5
A5
Side Paper Stop
Fig. 2-16 Setting the Side Paper Stop
2–13
USER’S GUIDE
4. Slightly lift the edge of the sliding guides and move them separately so as to match the size of paper to be used. Match the paper length first and then the paper width when setting for larger size paper. Match the paper width first and then the paper length when setting for smaller size paper.
Fig. 2-17 Adjusting the Paper Cassette Sizes
5. Load paper into the paper cassette as shown below.
✒ Note
Do not load more than 500 sheets of paper (80 g/m 2 or 20 lbs.) in the cassette, or paper jams may occur. Paper (80 g/m 2 or 20 lbs.) should be loaded up to the arrow head marked on the sliding guide.
2–14
Fig. 2-18 Loading Paper into the Cassette
6. Install the paper cassette into the printer.
✒ Note
You can check the remaining paper with the paper indicator located on the front right of the paper cassette.
CHAPTER 2 GETTING STARTED
1. Open the multi-purpose tray by pressing the front door of the tray lightly and lowering it gently.
✒ Note
Pull out the extension tray of the multi-purpose tray for long paper if it is necessary.
Fig. 2-19 Opening the Multi-purpose Tray and Pulling Out the Extension Tray
2. Lift up and slide the paper width guide to the far right side.
3. Place a stack of paper or envelopes on the tray until it is securely seated.
✒ Notes
When you place paper on the multi-purpose tray, note the following:
•
•
The print surface must be face up.
The leading edge must be placed inside first and lightly against the printer.
•
•
The left side must be aligned with the left guide.
The top of the paper stack must be under the holders on both sides of the tray. The maximum thickness is 16.5 mm or 0.65 inches.
2–15
USER’S GUIDE
Fig. 2-20 Placing Paper on the Multi-purpose Tray
4. Lift up and slide the paper width guide to match the paper width, so that it lightly touches the right side of the paper stack.
!
Caution
• Make sure that the neatly stacked paper is correctly seated on the multi-purpose tray, otherwise paper may not be fed correctly, resulting in a skewed printout or a paper jam.
• When printing, the inside tray automatically rises to feed paper into the printer.
2–16
CHAPTER 2 GETTING STARTED
Connecting the Printer to Your Computer
This printer has a bi-directional parallel interface and an RS-232C serial interface. They allow the printer to communicate with IBM/PC ® or compatible computers. Before connecting the printer and computer, you need to purchase or make a connecting cable specifically for the interface to be used. See “INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS” in Appendix.
Since the automatic interface selection mode has been factory set, simply connect the interface cable to the printer. In some cases, you need to turn off the high-speed and bi-directional parallel communications with the
MODE switch. For further information, see “MODE Switch” in Chapter 4.
When you use the serial interface, you need to have the same communications settings on both the printer and computer. Since the automatic interface selection mode has been factory set with certain factory settings (baud rate = 9600, code type = 8 bits, parity = none, stop bit = 1,
Xon/Xoff = ON, DTR (ER) = ON, and Robust Xon = ON), you may simply connect the interface cable if these are the same as the settings on your computer. When necessary, set the communications parameters with the
MODE switch on the printer. For further information, see “MODE Switch” in Chapter 4. For the settings on the computer, see the manual of the computer or software you use.
Connect the printer to your computer as follows:
1. Make sure that both the computer and the printer are turned off.
!
Caution
Always turn off the printer and computer when connecting and disconnecting the cable.
2. Connect one end of the interface cable to the interface connector located on the back of the printer.
2–17
USER’S GUIDE
3. Secure the connection with wire clips or screws on the printer.
Parallel Interface Port
Secure connection with wire clips.
Computer
Serial Interface Port
Secure connection with screws.
Printer
Fig. 2-21 Connecting the Printer and Computer
4. Connect the other end of the interface cable to the interface connector on your computer. Be sure to secure the connection on the computer, also.
2–18
CHAPTER 2 GETTING STARTED
Turning the Printer On and Off
Plugging in the Power Cord
Plug in the power cord as follows:
1. Make sure that the POWER switch is OFF “O”: the switch is on the front right hand side of the printer.
2. Attach the power cord to the printer and plug it into an appropriate AC outlet.
Fig. 2-22 Plugging in the Power Cord
!
Caution
• Check the AC voltage. This printer should be operated at the specified voltage and frequency.
• USA and Canada: AC 110 to 120 V, 60 Hz
• Europe and Australia: AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz
• Since this printer must be electrically grounded, the power cord should be connected to a grounded AC outlet.
• The total length of the power cord, including extension cords, should not exceed 5 meters (16.4 feet). Use of a longer power cord may result in reduced voltage or malfunctions.
•
•
Do not unplug the power cord to turn off the printer.
The printer should be installed near a power outlet which is easily accessible.
2–19
USER’S GUIDE
Pressing the POWER Switch
The POWER switch is on the front right hand side of the printer. Pressing the ON side “ | ” supplies power to the printer, which then performs a self test and warm up. Pressing the OFF side “O” turns the power off.
2–20
ON
OFF
Fig. 2-23 Pressing the POWER Switch
!
Caution
Always wait at least 2 seconds after turning off the power before turning it back on.
Do not turn the power off while the printer is printing, as this may cause a paper jam and adversely affect the printer.
The printer performs a self-diagnosis at start-up to check its hardware and software. If the printer should find any problems, the display will show the corresponding message. See
“TROUBLESHOOTING” in Chapter 7 .
04 SELF TEST
The display shows several messages quickly at start-up. If the printer detects no errors, it automatically goes on-line and the message changes to show the current printer status and settings.
LJ READY 001P T1
LJ : The auto emulation selection is set and currently the HP
LaserJet 4+ emulation mode is selected.
READY : The printer is ready to print.
001 : The number of copies to print is set to 1.
P : Portrait print is selected.
T1 : Paper is fed from Tray1.
CHAPTER 2 GETTING STARTED
Printing the Test Patterns or Lists
You can check print quality and print a list of available fonts before you actually start working with the printer. To do so, follow these steps:
1. Make sure that you have already set the toner cartridge and loaded paper into the cassette or the multi-purpose tray.
2 Turn on the printer. Wait until the display shows the message as follows.
LJ READY 001P T1
or
LJ READY 001P MP
3. Press the SEL switch to set the printer off-line.
The ON LINE lamp goes off.
4. Hold down the SHIFT switch and press the TEST switch.
5. Press the ▲ or ▼ switch to scroll through the display until the desired message appears. To print your selection, press the SET switch.
Choose from one of the following selections :
To print out the demo page,
DEMO PAGE
To print out the test pattern,
TEST PRINT
To print out the list of printer settings,
PRINT CONFIG
To print out the list of internal or resident fonts,
PRINT FONTS I
2–21
USER’S GUIDE
To print out the list of optional cartridge/card fonts,
PRINT FONTS C
To print out the list of permanent download fonts,
PRINT FONTS P
To exit from the test mode,
exit
✒ Notes
The messages “PRINT FONTS C” or “PRINT FONTS P” appear only when an optional font cartridge/card is installed in the font slot or the permanent download fonts are stored in printer memory respectively.
• If the optional font cartridge/card is installed, you can print out a list of optional fonts. Since the list shows the ID numbers specific to each optional font, it helps you to select them with the FONT switch. For further information, see “FONT Switch” in Chapter 4 and “FONT
CARTRIDGE/CARD, FLASH MEMORY/HDD CARD” in Chapter 5 .
• If user-defined characters are already downloaded into the printer memory as permanent download fonts, you can print out a list of them.
For further information, see
2–22
CHAPTER 2 GETTING STARTED
6. Press the SET switch.
The printer starts printing the selected test pattern or list. When the printer finishes printing, it automatically exits to the off-line state.
TEST PRINT
!"#$%&'()*+,-./1234567890:;@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz[|
"#$%&'()*+,-./1234567890:;@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{\}
#$%&'()*+,-./1234567890:;@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{\}~
$%&'()*+,-./1234567890:;@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{\}~!
%&'()*+,-./1234567890:;@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{\}~!"
&'()*+,-./1234567890:;@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{\}~!"#
'()*+,-./1234567890:;@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{\}~!"#$
()*+,-./1234567890:;@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{\}~!"#$%
)*+,-./1234567890:;@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{\}~!"#$%&
*+,-./1234567890:;@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{\}~!"#$%&'
+,-./1234567890:;@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{\}~!"#$%&'(
,-./1234567890:;@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{\}~!"#$%&'()
-./1234567890:;@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{\}~!"#$%&'()*
./1234567890:;@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{\}~!"#$%&'()*+
/1234567890:;@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{\}~!"#$%&'()*+,
1234567890:;@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{\}~!"#$%&'()*+,-
234567890:;@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{\}~!"#$%&'()*+,-.
34567890:;@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{\}~!"#$%&'()*+,-./
4567890:;@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{\}~!"#$%&'()*+,-./1
567890:;@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{\}~!"#$%&'()*+,-./12
67890:;@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{\}~!"#$%&'()*+,-./123
7890:;@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{\}~!"#$%&'()*+,-./1234
890:;@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{\}~!"#$%&'()*+,-./12345
90:;@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{\}~!"#$%&'()*+,-./123456
ABC
PRINT CONFIGURAITION(1/2)
(LJ):HP LaserJet 4 (BS):BR-Script 2 (GL):HP-GL
(FX):EPSON FX-850 (PR):IBMProprinterXL
PAGE COUNTER = 682
RAM SIZE = 10Mbyte
USER SETTINGS SETTING1 SETTING2
< EMULATION >
EMULATION AUTO LaserJet4 AUTO LaserJet4 AUTO LaserJet4
AUTO TIME OUT (S) 5 5 5
EPSON/IBM EPSON EPSON EPSON
KEEP PCL OFF OFF OFF
< MODE >
- INTERFACE MODE -
I/F PARALLEL <- <-
AUTO TIME OUT (S) 5 <- <-
PRL SETTING
HIGH SPEED ON <- <-
BI-DIR ON <- <-
RS-232C SETTING
BaundRate (BAUD) 9600 <- <-
CodeType (bits) 8 <- <-
Parity NONE <- <-
Stop Bit (bits) 1 <- <-
Xon/Xoff ON <- <-
DTR(ER) ON <- <-
Robust Xon OFF <- <-
- FORMAT MODE -
ORIENTATION PORTRAIT <- <-
AUTO MODE
(LJ)
AUTO LF OFF OFF OFF
AUTO CR OFF OFF OFF
AUTO WRAP OFF OFF OFF
AUTO SKIP ON ON ON
(FX)
AUTO LF OFF OFF OFF
AUTO MASK OFF OFF OFF
(PR)
AUTO LF OFF OFF OFF
AUTO CR OFF OFF OFF
AUTO MASK OFF OFF OFF
PAGE FORMAT MODE
X OFFSET (dots) 0 <- <-
Y OFFSET (dots) 0 <- <-
PAPER A4 A4 A4
(LJ)
LEFT M (C) 0 0 0
RIGHT M (C) 78 78 78
TOP M (") 0.5 0.5 0.5
BOTTOM M (") 0.5 0.5 0.5
LINES (L) 64 64 64
(FX)
LEFT M (C) 0 0 0
RIGHT M (C) 80 80 80
TOP M (") .33 .33 .33
BOTTOM M (") .33 .33 .33
LINES (L) 66 66 66
(PR)
LEFT M (C) 0 0 0
RIGHT M (C) 80 80 80
TOP M (") .33 .33 .33
BOTTOM M (") .33 .33 .33
LINES (L) 66 66 66
- RESOLUTION MODE -
RESOLUTION (DPI) 600 <- <-
HRC MEDIUM <- <-
TEST PRINT PRINT CONFIG
PORTRAIT LIST
INTERNAL FONT
NUMBER SYMBOL SET
(ID) PITCH SIZE STYLE WEIGHT TYPEFACE F O N T S A M P L E(600dpi)
I000 8U:ROMAN 8...
P: Scalable Upright(0) Medium(0) PcTENNES Reg (4101)
ABCDefgh123?!"#$%&'()<>/012
ESC(IDESC(s1p#v0s0b4101T (#:point size 0.25 - 999.75)
I001 8U:ROMAN 8...
P: Scalable Upright(0) Bold(3) PcTENNES Bd (4101)
ABCDefgh123?!"#$%&'()<>/01
ESC(IDESC(s1p#v0s3b4101T (#:point size 0.25 - 999.75)
I002 8U:ROMAN 8...
P: Scalable Italic(1) Midium(0) PcTENNES It (4101)
ABCDefgh123?!"#$%&'()<>/012
ESC(IDESC(s1p#v1s0b4101T (#:point size 0.25 - 999.75)
I003 8U:ROMAN 8...
P: Scalable Italic(1) Bold(3) PcTENNES BdIt (4101)
ABCDefgh123?!"#$%&'()<>/012
ESC(IDESC(s1p#v1s3b4101T (#:point size 0.25 - 999.75)
I004 8U:ROMAN 8...
P: Scalable Upright(0) Medium(0) OKLAHOMA Reg (4113)
ABCDefgh123?!"#$%&'()<>/0
ESC(IDESC(s1p#v0s0b4113T (#:point size 0.25 - 999.75)
I005 8U:ROMAN 8...
P: Scalable Upright(0) Bold(3) OKLAHOMA Bd (4113)
ABCDefgh123?!"#$%&'()<>/0
ESC(IDESC(s1p#v0s3b4113T (#:point size 0.25 - 999.75)
I006 8U:ROMAN 8...
P: Scalable Italic(1) Medium(0) OKLAHOMA It (4113)
ABCDefgh123?!"#$%&'()<>/0
ESC(IDESC(s1p#v1s0b4113T (#:point size 0.25 - 999.75)
I007 8U:ROMAN 8...
P: Scalable Italic(1) Bold(3) OKLAHOMA BdIt (4113)
ABCDefgh123?!"#$%&'()<>/0
ESC(IDESC(s1p#v1s3b4113T (#:point size 0.25 - 999.75)
I008 8U:ROMAN 8...
P: Scalable Italic(1) Medium(0) CONNECTICUT (4116)
ABCDefgh123?!"#$%&'()<>/0123456
ESC(IDESC(s1p#v1s0b4116T (#:point size 0.25 - 999.75)
I009 8U:ROMAN 8...
P: Scalable Upright(4) Bold(3) CLEVELAND Cd (4140)
ABCDefgh123?!"#$%&'()<>/
ESC(IDESC(s1p#v4s3b4140T (#:point size 0.25 - 999.75)
I010 8U:ROMAN 8...
P: Scalable Upright(0) Light(-3) PcBRUSSEL Lt (4143)
ABCDefgh123?!"#$%&'()<>/
ESC(IDESC(s1p#v0s-3b4143T (#:point size 0.25 - 999.75)
I011 8U:ROMAN 8...
P: Scalable Upright(0) Bold(2) PcBRUSSEL Bd (4143)
ABCDefgh123?!"#$%&'()<>
ESC(IDESC(s1p#v0s2b4143T (#:point size 0.25 - 999.75)
I012 8U:ROMAN 8...
P: Scalable Italic(1) Light(-3) PcBRUSSEL LtIt(4143)
ABCDefgh123?!"#$%&'()<>/
ESC(IDESC(s1p#v1s-3b4143T (#:point size 0.25 - 999.75)
I013 8U:ROMAN 8...
P: Scalable Italic(1) Bold(2) PcBRUSSEL BdIt(4143)
ABCDefgh123?!"#$%&'()<>
ESC(IDESC(s1p#v1s2b4143T (#:point size 0.25 - 999.75)
I014 8U:ROMAN 8...
P: Scalable Upright(0) Medium(0) UTAH Reg (4148)
ABCDefgh123?!"#$%&'()<>/01
ESC(IDESC(s1p#v0s0b4148T (#:point size 0.25 - 999.75)
I015 8U:ROMAN 8...
P: Scalable Upright(0) Bold(3) UTAH Bd (4148)
ABCDefgh123?!"#$%&'()<>/0
ESC(IDESC(s1p#v0s3b4148T (#:point size 0.25 - 999.75)
I016 8U:ROMAN 8...
P: Scalable Italic(1) Medium(0) UTAH It (4148)
ABCDefgh123?!"#$%&'()<>/01
ESC(IDESC(s1p#v1s0b4148T (#:point size 0.25 - 999.75)
I017 8U:ROMAN 8...
P: Scalable Italic(1) Bold(3) UTAH BdIt (4148)
ABCDefgh123?!"#$%&'()<>/0
ESC(IDESC(s1p#v1s3b4148T (#:point size 0.25 - 999.75)
ID:Symbol Set ID
PRINT FONTS I
Fig. 2-24 Test Pattern, Setting List, and Font List
2–23
USER’S GUIDE
Checking the Printed Test Pattern or Demo Page
After you print out the test pattern or demo page as described in the previous section, take a look at the printed sheet to check print quality.
The printer has been shipped with the print density properly adjusted with the control panel switches. If you are not satisfied with the printout (too light or dark for example), adjust the print density as follows:
1. Turn on the printer.
2. Press the SEL switch to set the printer off-line state.
3. Press the MODE switch.
4. Press the ▲ or ▼ switch to scroll through the display until the
“ADVANCED MODE” appears.
5. Press the SET switch.
6. Press the ▲ or ▼ switch to scroll through the display until the “PRINT
DENSITY” appears.
7. Press the SET switch.
8. Press the ▲ or ▼ switch until the desired print density value appears.
The value can change from 1 (light) to 15 (dark).
9. Press the SET switch.
10. Press the SEL switch to exit from the mode menus and set the printer on-line state.
For more information, see “MODE Switch” in Chapter 4.
2–24
CHAPTER 3 BEFORE WORKING WITH THE PRINTER
CHAPTER 3
BEFORE WORKING WITH THE PRINTER
SOFTWARE COMPATIBILITY
Before working with your application software, you need to set up or install the printer driver in your software. Locate the printers that your application software supports and install the desired printer driver. Each software package differs in the way the printer driver is selected. Read the software manual and follow the setup or installation procedures.
Be sure to select the printer emulation mode that matches the installed printer driver. This printer emulates particular printer models of the following manufacturers. Since this printer has been factory set with the automatic emulation selection on, you may not need to select the emulation mode. When necessary, select the appropriate printer emulation mode with the panel switches according to the printer driver installed in your application software. See
Printer Driver Emulation Mode
* HL-1660 HP LaserJet 4+
* HL-1260e HP LaserJet 4+
HL-1260 HP LaserJet 4+
HL-10h HP LaserJet 4+
HP LaserJet 4+ HP LaserJet 4+
HL-10V/DV HP LaserJet 4+
HP LaserJet III™ HP LaserJet 4+
HP LaserJet IIID™ HP LaserJet 4+
HP LaserJet Series II™ HP LaserJet 4+
HP LaserJet IID™ HP LaserJet 4+
HP LaserJet Plus™ HP LaserJet 4+
* HL-1660 (BR-Script 2) BR-Script 2
* HL-1260e (BR-Script 2) BR-Script 2
HL-1260 (BR-Script 2) BR-Script 2
PostScript
®
level 2 language printer BR-Script 2
HL-10h (BR-Script) BR-Script 2
HL-10PS/DPS BR-Script 2
HL-8PS BR-Script 2
Apple
®
LaserWriter
®
II NT/NTX BR-Script 2
PostScript
®
language printer BR-Script 2
* HP 7475A™ HP-GL
HP-GL™ HP-GL
* EPSON FX-850 EPSON FX-850
EPSON FX-80™ EPSON FX-850
* IBM Proprinter XL IBM Proprinter XL
IBM Proprinter XL
3–1
USER’S GUIDE
To get the most out of this printer, you need to install the printer driver for this printer or the HP LaserJet 4+ and select the HP LaserJet 4+ emulation mode: this is the best combination. When any other HP LaserJet series printer driver is installed, select the HP LaserJet 4+ emulation mode. When any other printer driver is installed, select the HP-GL, BR-Script 2,
EPSON, or IBM emulation mode according to the installed printer driver.
You may find difficulty in printing EPS file format pictures with the HP
LaserJet 4+ mode. In this case, it is better to select the BR-Script 2 mode.
An asterisk (*) indicates the best or recommended combination of the printer driver and emulation mode. Be sure to use any of these best or recommended combinations if circumstances permit. When an emulation mode other than the HP mode or BR-Script 2 is selected, the printout may differ slightly from the printout that the target printer produces.
For Windows 95 or Windows 3.1 users, to get the best performance from your printer, install the driver supplied with your printer.
3–2
CHAPTER 3 BEFORE WORKING WITH THE PRINTER
AUTOMATIC EMULATION SELECTION
This printer has an automatic emulation selection function. When the printer receives data from the computer, it automatically selects the emulation mode. This function has been factory set to ON.
The printer can select the emulation among the following combinations:
EPSON/IBM Priority EPSON (default) IBM
Auto Selection Mode HP LaserJet 4+ HP LaserJet 4+
BR-Script 2 BR-Script 2
HP-GL HP-GL
EPSON FX-850 IBM Proprinter XL
To get the most out of this laser printer, we recommend you use the HP
LaserJet 4+ emulation mode, which is a true laser printer mode. Since the
HP LaserJet 4+ mode takes the highest priority in the automatic emulation selection, you can start using the printer as it is with the factory settings in most cases.
When the automatic emulation selection is active, you can check the current emulation on the display. When the printer is in ready, print, or wait states, the display reads as follows:
Emulation Status Display in Ready State
HP LaserJet 4+
LJ READY 001P T1
BR-Script 2
BS IDLE 001P T1
HP-GL
GL READY 001P T1
EPSON FX-850
FX READY 001P T1
IBM Proprinter XL
PR READY 001P T1
To select the emulation mode manually, use the EMULATION switch. For
further information, see “EMULATION Switch” in Chapter 4 .
3–3
USER’S GUIDE
✒ Notes
When you use the automatic emulation selection, note the following:
• Once the emulation is automatically changed, it is not changed again for a short period of time. This time period is called “Time Out” and it can be set with the EMULATION switch. The factory setting is 5 seconds.
• The EPSON or IBM emulation mode priority must be selected, as the printer cannot distinguish between them. Since the factory setting is the
EPSON emulation mode, you might need to select the IBM emulation mode with the EMULATION switch when you need to use this emulation..
• Try this function with your application software or network server. If the function does not work properly, select the required emulation mode manually using the printer panel switches or use emulation selection commands from your software.
3–4
CHAPTER 3 BEFORE WORKING WITH THE PRINTER
AUTOMATIC INTERFACE SELECTION
This printer has an automatic interface selection function. When the printer receives data from the computer, it automatically selects the bi-directional parallel, RS-232C serial interface, or MIO interface as appropriate.
When you use the parallel interface, you can turn the high-speed and bidirectional parallel communications on or off with the MODE switch. For
further information, see “MODE Switch” in Chapter 4 . Since the automatic
interface selection mode has been factory set to ON, simply connect the interface cable to the printer.
When you use the serial interface, you need to have the same communications settings on both the printer and computer. Since the automatic interface selection mode has been factory set with certain settings, you may be able to simply connect the interface cable to the printer if your computer has the settings listed below.
Communications Parameters Factory Settings
Baud rate (data transfer speed) 9600
Code type (data length) 8 bits
Parity (data error check) None
Stop bit (data separator) 1 stop bit
Xon/Xoff (handshake protocol) ON
DTR (ER) ON
Robust Xon OFF
If a commercial interface card has been installed in the MIO card slot, it can be selected automatically.
When necessary, select the interface or the serial communications parameters manually with the MODE switch (INTERFACE MODE) on the
printer. For further information, see “MODE Switch” in Chapter 4 . For the
settings on the computer, see the manual of the computer or software you are using.
3–5
USER’S GUIDE
✒ Notes
When you use the automatic interface selection, note the following:
• Once the interface is automatically changed, it is not changed again for a short period of time. This time period is called “Time Out” and it can be set with the MODE switch. The factory setting is 5 seconds.
• The communications parameters [ baud rate, code type, parity, stop bit,
Xon/Xoff, DTR(ER), and Robust Xon] must be set for the serial interface. Although they have been factory set as shown in the above table, you may need to change them with the MODE switch.
• This function takes a few seconds to work. If you want to speed up printing, select the required interface manually with the MODE switch.
If you constantly use only one interface, we recommend that you select that interface in the interface mode. The printer allocates all of the input buffer to that interface if only one interface is selected.
3–6
CHAPTER 3 BEFORE WORKING WITH THE PRINTER
ABOUT THE CONTROL PANEL
Adjusting the Control Panel Angle
You can adjust the control panel to the desired angle, so you can easily read the display messages.
To adjust the angle of control panel, gently pinch the tab on the right side of the panel and move the control panel up and down.
Fig. 3-1 Adjusting the Control Panel Angle
3–7
USER’S GUIDE
Selecting the Local Language Display
The display usually shows the current printer status. When you operate the control panel switches, it shows functions and settings. If any trouble occurs, it shows the corresponding error message. You can see these messages in several languages. The default language is English.
• English
• French
• German • Spanish • Norwegian • Danish
• Dutch • Italian • Finnish • Portuguese
To change to another language:
1. Turn off the printer.
2. Hold down the FORM FEED switch and turn on the printer.
The message “SELF TEST” appears and then the message changes to
“LANG.=ENGLISH * ”.
3. Press the ▲ or ▼ switch until your desired language appears on the display.
4. Press the SET switch to make the selected language message effective.
An asterisk (*) appears at the end of the display for a short time, and then the printer automatically returns to on-line state with the selected language message on the display.
3–8
CHAPTER 3 BEFORE WORKING WITH THE PRINTER
Using the Panel Switches
The printer has a versatile control panel. It has two operation modes:
When you press the switches, they work in the NORMAL mode as indicated above the switches. When you press the switches with the SHIFT switch held down, they work in the SHIFT mode as indicated below the switches. You can control the basic printer operations and make various printer settings in the NORMAL and SHIFT modes.
For further information, see
“SWITCHES IN SHIFT MODE” in Chapter 4 .
▲ (UP) – Forward scroll through modes and settings.
▼ (DOWN) – Reverse scroll through modes and settings.
CONTINUE – Ignores the error and resumes operation.
SET – Sets selected mode and functions.
FORM FEED – Prints out remaining data or reprints the same page.
FONT – Selects font and character set.
MODE – Sets functions in various modes.
SEL – Selects on-line or off-line state.
ON LINE – Lights when printer is in the on-line state.
READY – Lights when printer is ready to print.
DATA – Blinks when data is being received and lights when unprinted data remains in printer memory.
ALARM – Lights if any errors occur.
Display – Shows various messages.
EMULATION – Selects printer emulation.
ECONOMY – Selects toner save or power save mode.
FEEDER – Selects paper source and media type to be used and duplex printing.
COPY – Sets the number of copies to print.
SHIFT – Shifts switch operation.
RESET – Resets printer or restores to factory settings.
TEST – Prints self-test pattern or fonts.
Fig. 3-2 Switch Operation in NORMAL and SHIFT Modes
✒ Note
When the printer is in use in the BR-Script 2 mode, some switches are not used.
3–9
USER’S GUIDE
Printer Settings
You may operate the printer with the panel switch settings unchanged.
They have been factory set. When necessary, change and store them in the printer memory as user settings.
There are two types of printer settings available on this printer:
1. User Settings
2. Factory Settings
Remember that the user settings override the factory settings. The user settings are effective until other settings are made or they are restored to the factory settings.
User Settings
Although the printer settings have been factory set, you can change them with the control panel switches. Since this printer has a memory, you can store the panel switch settings in the memory as “User Settings.” They are recalled every time you turn on the printer.
In addition to the current settings, you can save two more sets of user settings with the MODE switch and restore to them with the RESET switch.
The current settings are cleared after restoring one of the saved user settings.
Factory Settings
The printer settings have been set at the factory before shipment. They are called “Factory Settings.” Although you can operate the printer with these factory settings unchanged, you can tailor the printer by making user settings.
✒ Note
Changing the user settings does not affect factory settings. You cannot modify the preset factory settings.
The changed user settings can be restored to the factory default settings with the RESET switch. For further information, see
Chapter 4 .
3–10
CHAPTER 3 BEFORE WORKING WITH THE PRINTER
PAPER HANDLING
Print Media
Paper Size
1. The upper paper cassette
Since the paper cassette is a universal type, you can use any of the sizes of paper in the list. The cassette can hold up to 500 sheets of paper (80 g/m 2 or
20 lbs.) or up to 40 envelopes (Paper should only be loaded up to the arrow head marked on the sliding guide).
2. The multi-purpose tray
The multi-purpose tray is the most useful feeder for you to handle many types of paper. The multi-purpose tray can hold up to 150 sheets of paper
(80 g/m 2 or 20 lbs.) or up to 15 envelopes.
The paper types and sizes that can be fed from the multi-purpose tray are as follows:
• Plain paper from 90 mm x 148 mm (3.5” x 5.8”) to 216 mm x 356 mm
(8.5” x 14”) [Weight = 60 to 135 g/m 2 (16 to 36 lbs)]
• Overhead projector (OHP) films
• Colored paper
• Postcards
• Label stock
• Envelopes of COM10, Monarch, C5, DL, or ISO B5 size
3. The optional lower paper cassette
The cassette can hold up to 500 sheets of paper (80 g/m 2 or 20 lbs.). It has a limitation on the paper sizes that can be used as shown in the list.
4. The duplex unit
The duplex unit can handle letter, legal, A4, Executive and ISO B5 (except
Tray 2) size papers from the feeders.
3–11
USER’S GUIDE paper source the multipurpose tray
(MP) the upper paper cassette
(T1) the optional lower paper cassette (T2) cut sheet : letter, legal, A4, ISO
B5, Executive, A5, ISO
B6 and A6 envelope: COM 10, Monarch, C5,
DL and ISO B5 other size: wide 90-216mm
(3.5”-8.5”)
long 148-356mm
(5.8”-14”) cut sheet : letter, legal, A4, ISO
B5, Executive, A5, ISO
B6 and A6 envelope :COM 10, Monarch, C5,
DL and ISO B5 cut sheet : letter, legal, A4,
Executive all sources for duplex printing (DX) available size cut sheet : letter, legal, A4, ISO
B5(except T2) and
Executive available type and capacity plain paper : 150 envelope : 15
OHP film : 100 label stock : 100 other type : weight =
60 to 135 g/m 2
(16 to 36 lbs) plain paper : 500 weight =
60 to 105 g/m 2
(16 to 28 lbs) envelope : 40 plain paper : 500 weight =
60 to 90 g/m 2
(16 to 24 lbs)
* The capacity of T1 is reduced from the above specified capacities with the duplex unit installed.
3–12
CHAPTER 3 BEFORE WORKING WITH THE PRINTER
Using Envelopes
Avoid using envelopes with the following characteristics:
• Smooth or shiny surfaces
• Protection cover at envelopes’ adhesive parts
• Sealing flaps that have not been folded at purchase
• Sealing flaps as shown below
• Three or more layers of paper in the marked area
• Each side folded as shown below
Fig. 3-3 Envelope Information
3–13
USER’S GUIDE
Before loading envelopes in the cassette, check the following:
• Envelopes should have a lengthwise sealing flap.
• The sealing flaps should be crisply and correctly folded (irregularly cut or folded envelopes may cause paper jams).
• Envelopes should consist of two layers of paper in the following marked area.
Feeding Direction
Fig. 3-4 Envelopes
✒ Note
If envelopes get smudged during printing, set the print density to a higher value in the ADVANCED MODE with MODE switch for darker printouts.
To adjust the print density setting, see
“Checking the Printed Test Pattern or
• Envelope joints that are sealed by the manufacturer should be secure.
• All sides should be properly folded without any wrinkles or creases.
3–14
CHAPTER 3 BEFORE WORKING WITH THE PRINTER
Cassette Feed
The printer can feed paper from the multi-purpose tray, the upper or the optional lower paper cassette. You can select the multi-purpose tray as a paper cassette with the FEEDER switch. Since the auto paper feed mode has been factory set, the printer usually feeds paper from the upper paper cassette. When the optional lower paper cassette is installed and the upper paper cassette runs out of paper, the printer automatically switches to the lower paper cassette. When the lower paper cassette runs out of paper or it is not installed, the printer automatically switches to the multi-purpose tray (T1>T2>MP) and feeds from there as long as they contain paper of the same size. When necessary, select the feeder
with the FEEDER switch. For further information, see “FEEDER
Switch” in Chapter 4 . For information about the lower paper cassette,
see
“LOWER TRAY UNIT” in Chapter 5 .
✒ Notes
When you load paper into the multi-purpose tray or the paper cassette, note the following:
• If you use the multi-purpose tray, the paper size has to be manually set
• in the MP TRAY SETTING mode with the FEEDER switch.
If your application software supports paper size selection on the print menu, you can select it through the software. If your application software does not support it, you can set the paper size with the MODE
• switch.
The paper size has been factory set to letter for 110/120V models or A4 for 220/240V models. If you want to use other sizes of paper or envelopes, change the paper size in the PAGE FORMAT MODE of the
FORMAT MODE with the MODE switch. For paper size selection, see
•
“MODE Switch” in Chapter 4.
If you use pre-printed paper in the cassettes, please note that the paper should be loaded with the printed side face down and the top of the paper to the front of the cassette. If you use pre-printed paper in the multi-purpose tray, the paper should be loaded with the printed side face up and the top of the paper towards the printer.
You can set the paper size for the paper cassette with the MODE switch in the PAGE FORMAT mode. The printer automatically detects the paper size you set in the paper cassette. If you load a different size of paper in the paper cassette from the size selected with the MODE switch or through your application software, the printer prompts you to set the proper size of paper as follows:
LOAD PAPER
↔
**** SIZE
(
****
indicates the paper size you have selected with the MODE switch in the PAGE FORMAT mode or through your application software.)
3–15
USER’S GUIDE
Multi-purpose
Tray (MP)
Upper Paper
Cassette (Tray 1)
Lower Paper
Cassette (Tray 2)
Fig. 3-5 Cassette Feed
Manual Feed
When you set paper in the multi-purpose tray with the setting MANUAL
FEED = ON selected with the FEEDER switch, the printer loads paper only from the multi-purpose tray regardless of the previous feeder selection. When you select the setting PAPER IN = CONT in the MP TRAY
SETTING mode, the printer loads paper automatically from the multipurpose tray. When you select the setting PAPER IN = STOP, the printer waits for you to press the SEL key to start printing. You can set the paper feed mode and the paper size with the FEEDER switch. For further
information, see “FEEDER Switch” in Chapter 4.
✒ Notes
When you feed paper manually, note the following:
• If your application software supports a manual feed selection in the print menu, you can select it through the software. Since the software or command setting overrides the switch setting, you do not need to set the manual feed mode and the paper size with the FEEDER switch.
• If you use pre-printed paper in the multipurpose tray, please note that it is inserted with the pre-printed side face up. Insert the top of the page towards the printer in the multi-purpose tray.
3–16
CHAPTER 3 BEFORE WORKING WITH THE PRINTER
Face Down Print Delivery
The printer normally ejects paper onto the top of the printer with the printed page face down.
Fig. 3-6 Face Down Print Delivery
Face Up Print Delivery
You can change the print delivery path from the top to the rear of the printer. Push down the knob located inside the rear paper slit on the left of the paper path selector guide.
Knob
Paper Path
Selector Guide
Rear Paper Slit
Fig. 3-7 Face Up Print Delivery
The printer ejects paper through the rear paper slit with the printed page face up.
✒ Note
After you have finished face up print delivery, be sure to reset the knob to switch back to the face down print delivery.
3–17
CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL
CHAPTER 4
CONTROL PANEL
DISPLAY AND LAMPS
This printer has one liquid crystal display (LCD) and four lamps on the control panel. The display can show various messages with up to 16 characters. The lamps light to indicate the current printer status.
Fig. 4-1 Display and Lamps
Display
The display usually shows the current printer status. When you operate the control panel, you can change settings interactively on the display.
When you turn the printer off-line, the display changes to show the currently selected emulation and informs you that you can make settings in the current emulation.
If any problems occur, the display shows the corresponding operator call, error, or service call message to prompt you to take an action. For more information on these messages, see
7 .
4–1
USER’S GUIDE
Printer Status Messages
The following table shows the printer status messages that are displayed during normal operation:
Printer Status Message Meaning
00 READY 001P T1
The printer is ready to print.
00 IDLE 001P T1
The printer is idle. (BR-Script 2 mode only)
AUTO LaserJet 4+
The printer is off-line and currently in HP
LaserJet 4+ mode under AUTO emulation mode selected.
HP LaserJet 4+
The printer is off-line and in HP LaserJet 4+ mode under HP LaserJet 4+ emulation mode selected.
00 BUSY 001P T1
The printer is busy. (BR-Script 2 mode only)
00 SLEEP 001P T1
The printer is in sleep status (power save mode).
01 PRINT 001P T1
The printer is printing.
01 PR300 001P T1
The printer is printing bydecreasing the resolution from 600 dpi to 300 dpi because of insufficient memory.
01 SX 001P T1
The printer is printing in simplex mode due to insufficient memory for the selected duplex mode.
02 WAIT 001P T1
The printer is warming up.
04 SELF TEST
The printer is performing self-diagnosis.
05 TEST PRINT
The printer is printing the test pattern.
06 DEMO PAGE
The printer is printing the demonstration.
06 PRINT CONFIG
The printer is printing the list of the current printer settings.
06 PRINT FONTS I
The printer is printing the list of the internal or resident fonts.
06 PRINT FONTS C
The printer is printing the list of the optional fonts stored in an installed font cartridge/card.
06 PRINT FONTS P
The printer is printing the list of the permanent download fonts.
06 CARD PRINT
The printer is printing the contents of a flash memory card or HDD card.
4–2
CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL
Printer Status Message
07 FF PAUSE
Meaning (Continued)
The printer has suspended feeding forms.
Pressing the SEL switch resumes form feed.
08 RESET TO
USER SETTINGS
The printer is restoring itself to the user settings you selected with the panel switches. (The message appears only momentarily.)
09 RESET TO
The printer is restoring itself to the
FACTORY SETTINGS
factory settings. (The message appears only momentarily.)
Now initializing
The printer is initializing the MIO card or initializing the printer for BR-Script 2 emulation.
01 PRINT 002 L ■ T1
Paper Source
“MP” ... Multi-Purpose Tray
“MN” ... Manual Feed
“T1” ... Tray 2
“T2” ... Tray 2
Duplex
“
■
” ... Duplex
“ ” ... Simplex
Orientation
“P” ... Portrait
“L” ... Landscape
Copy Pages Status
Emulation
“##” ... Fixed emulation expressed with double figures
“LJ” ... AUTO HP LaserJet 4+ emulation
“BS” ... AUTO BR-Script 2
“GL” ... AUTO HP-GL emulation
“FX” ... AUTO EPSON FX-850 emulation
“PR” ... AUTO IBM Proprinter XL emulation
Fig. 4-2 Display
4–3
USER’S GUIDE
Lamps
The lamps light or blink to indicate the current printer status.
READY
LED indication Meaning
On
Blinking
Ready to print
Warming up
DATA
LED indication Meaning
On Data remains in the printer buffer. Pressing the
FORM FEED switch prints the data and clears
Blinking the buffer.
Receiving or processing data
ALARM
LED indication Meaning
On Some problem has occurred in the printer.
ON LINE
LED indication Meaning
On The printer is on-line and ready to print
Off The printer is off-line and stops printing.
4–4
CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL
SWITCHES IN NORMAL MODE
You can control the basic printer operations and change various printer settings in the NORMAL mode. Functions available in the NORMAL mode are shown above the panel switches.
Fig. 4-3 Switches in NORMAL Mode
✒ Note
The factory settings are printed in bold in this section.
SEL Switch
Pressing the SEL switch changes the state of the printer between on-line and off-line. When the printer is on-line, the ON LINE lamp lights and the printer is ready to receive data from the computer. When the printer is offline, the ON LINE lamp is off.
To receive data from the computer, set the printer on-line. To operate the control panel switches, set the printer off-line.
When you press the SEL switch when the printer is the on-line state, it turns off-line and the LCD displays the current emulation mode.
AUTO LaserJet 4+
You can enter other emulations in the auto emulation mode by pressing the
▲ (UP) or ▼ (DOWN) switch.
4–5
USER’S GUIDE
✒ Notes
When you press the SEL switch, remember the following:
•
All other switches—except the SEL switch—are operational only when the printer is off-line.
• If the printer is not in auto emulation mode, the LCD displays the current emulation by pressing the SEL key to take it off-line, but you cannot enter other emulation modes. To make settings in other emulation modes, press the EMULATION switch and select the emulation.
•
The SEL switch works as a “quick exit” switch. If you are lost in the display menus or you want to quickly exit the display menu, press the
SEL switch. You can exit quickly from any depth of the display menu to the on-line ready state. If you have already made a setting effective by pressing the SET switch and then press the SEL switch to quickly exit, your setting (whether made by accident or on purpose) will remain effective. Pressing the SEL switch will not cancel any setting.
SET Switch
Pressing the SET switch allows you to select certain items on the display or make the displayed menu or setting effective. The switch also works as an execute switch to perform the displayed function.
When you press the SET switch, the printer stores the settings you have selected into the memory as “User Settings.” Every time you turn on the printer, it is reset according to these user settings. They remain effective until you make new settings or restore them to the factory settings. For factory reset, see “RESET Switch” in this chapter.
✒ Note
When you press the SET switch to select a setting, an asterisk appears at the end of display for a short time. Since the asterisk indicates the selection, you can easily find the current setting when you scroll through the display.
▲
(UP) or
▼
(DOWN) Switch
Pressing ▲ (UP) or ▼ (DOWN) switch scrolls the menus and settings forward or backward respectively on the display. Press or keep pressing the switch until you access the desired item.
4–6
CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL
MODE Switch
Pressing the MODE switch allows you to enter modes where you change settings. The mode menus and settings vary according to the current emulation mode and options. For details, refer to the pages indicated in parentheses.
HP LaserJet 4+, EPSON
FX-850, and IBM Proprinter XL Modes
INTERFACE MODE
Set interface, parameters. (4-17)
BR-Script Mode
INTERFACE MODE
Set interface, parameters. (4-17)
HP-GL Mode
INTERFACE MODE
Set interface, parameters. (4-17)
FORMAT MODE
Set orientation, paper size, margins, & others. (4-20)
FORMAT MODE
Set horizontal & vertical offsets. (4-20)
FORMAT MODE
Set orientation, paper size, margins, pen setting & others. (4-20)
RESOLUTION MODE RESOLUTION MODE RESOLUTION MODE
Set resolution & HRC. (4-28) Set resolution & HRC. (4-28) Set resolution & HRC. (4-28)
PAGE PROTECTION
Protect data on a page. (4-31) Not available.
PAGE PROTECTION
Protect data on a page. (4-31)
CARD OPERATION
Set a flash memory card or a HDD card in
HP mode. (4-32)
CARD OPERATION
Set a flash memory card or a HDD card.
(4-32)
CARD OPERATION
Set a flash memory card or a HDD card.
(4-32)
ADVANCED MODE
Set network mode, print density, & others.
(4-41)
ADVANCED MODE
Set network mode, print density, & others.
(4-41)
ADVANCED MODE
Set network mode, print density, & others.
(4-41)
PAGE COUNTER
Show # of printed pages. (4-48)
exit MODE
Exit to off-line ready state. (4-48)
PAGE COUNTER
Show # of printed pages. (4-48)
exit MODE
Exit to off-line ready state. (4-48)
PAGE COUNTER
Show # of printed pages. (4-48)
exit MODE
Exit to off-line ready state. (4-48)
4–7
USER’S GUIDE
Mode Menu
INTERFACE MODE
(See 4-17.)
MODE Switch Settings in HP LaserJet 4+, EPSON FX-850, and
IBM Proprinter XL Modes
The following table shows all the selections you can make with the MODE switch in the HP LaserJet 4+, EPSON FX-850, and IBM Proprinter XL modes.
✒ Note
The mode menus and settings that can appear vary according to the current emulation mode, printer status, and any options that may be installed in the printer.
Setting Menu
I/F=PARALLEL
I/F=RS-232C
I/F=OPTION
I/F=AUTO
Sub-Setting Menu
HIGH SPEED=ON
BI-DIR=ON
Setting
ON or OFF
ON or OFF
BaudRate= 9600
CodeType=8 bits
Parity =NONE
150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400,
4800, 9600, 19200, 38400,
57600, or 115200 baud
7 or 8 bits
NONE, EVEN, or ODD
Stop Bit=1 bits
Xon/Xoff=ON
DTR (ER)=ON
HIGH SPEED=ON
BI-DIR=ON exit
RS-232C Setting
BaudRate= 9600
CodeType=8 bits
Parity =NONE
1 or 2 stop bits
ON or OFF
ON or OFF exit
Robust Xon=OFF ON or OFF
Exit to INTERFACE MODE
Available only when a commercial MIO card has been installed.
MIO Setting The settings available on the installed MIO card can appear under the sub-setting menu.
exit
TIME OUT= 5s
PRL Setting
Exit to INTERFACE MODE
1 to 99 seconds
Bi-directional settings for
AUTO
ON or OFF
ON or OFF
Exit to PRL Setting
Parameters for AUTO mode
150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400,
4800, 9600, 19200, 38400,
57600, or 115200 baud
7 or 8 bits
NONE, EVEN, or ODD
Stop Bit=1 bits
Xon/Xoff=ON
DTR (ER)=ON
Robust Xon=OFF exit
1 or 2 stop bits
ON or OFF
ON or OFF
ON or OFF
Exit to RS-232C Setting
4–8
CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL
Mode Menu (Continued)
INTERFACE MODE
(Continued)
FORMAT MODE
(See 4-20.)
RESOLUTION MODE
(See 4-28.)
PAGE PROTECTION
(See 4-31.)
CARD OPERATION
(HP mode only)
(See 4-32.)
Setting Menu
I/F AUTO
(Continued)
ORIENTATION
AUTO MODE
PAGE FORMAT MODE exit
RESOLUTION
HRC SETTING exit
PROTECT=AUTO
Sub-Setting Menu
MIO Setting
ORI=PORTRAIT
AUTO LF=OFF
AUTO CR=OFF
AUTO WRAP=OFF
LINES = 60L
(HP, Letter, Portrait)
LINES = 64L
(HP, A4, Portrait)
X OFFSET= 0
Y OFFSET= 0
Setting
Available only when a commercial MIO card has been installed. The settings available on the installed MIO card can appear under the sub-setting menu.
PORTRAIT or LANDSCAPE
ON … LF + CR
OFF … CR only
ON … LF, FF, or VT + CR
OFF … LF, FF, or VT only
ON … Auto wrap on
OFF … Auto wrap off
AUTO SKIP=ON
(HP mode)
ON … Auto FF at bottom
margin
OFF … No FF at bottom
margin
AUTO MASK=OFF ON … Auto mask on
(EPSON & IBM modes) OFF … Auto mask off exit Exit to AUTO MODE
PAPER =LETTER
(For 110/120V model)
PAPER =A4
(For 220/240V model)
LEFT M = 0C
RIGHT M = 80C
(Letter, Portrait)
RIGHT M = 78C
(A4, Portrait)
TOP M =0.5” (HP mode)
BOTTOM M=0.5”
(HP mode)
LETTER, LEGAL, A4, A5,
A6, B5, B6, EXECUTIVE,
COM10, MONARCH, C5 and
DL
0 to 126 columns
10 to 136 columns
10 to 136 columns
0, 0.33, 0.5, 1.0, 1.5, or 2.0”
0, 0.33, 0.5, 1.0, 1.5, or 2.0”
5 to 128 lines/page
5 to 128 lines/page exit
RESOLUTION
HRC=MEDIUM
-500 (left) to +500 (right) dots
-500 (down) to +500 (up) dots
Exit to PAGE FORMAT MODE
Exit to FORMAT MODE
300 or 600 dpi
OFF, LIGHT, MEDIUM, or DARK
Exit to RESOLUTION MODE
AUTO, OFF, LETTER, A4, or
LEGAL
When the commercial flash memory card or the HDD card has not been formatted:
FORMAT CARD Format the flash memory card or the
HDD card.
exit Exit to CARD OPERATION
4–9
USER’S GUIDE
Mode Menu (Continued)
CARD OPERATION
(HP mode only)
(See 4-32.)
ADVANCED MODE
(See 4-41.)
PAGE COUNTER
(See 4-48.) exit MODE
(See 4-48.)
Setting Menu Sub-Setting Menu Setting
When the commercial flash memory card or the HDD card has been formatted:
EXECUTE DATA Execute the data on the card.
DATA ID=##### exit
Execute the selected data.
Exit to EXECUTE DATA
CARD LIST
SAVE SAVE DATA
Print the contents of the card.
Send data to be saved.
SET KEY--> END
DATA ID=#####
SAVE MACRO
MACRO ID=#####
PRIMARY FONT
FONT ID=#####
SECONDARY FONT
FONT ID=#####
DOWNLOAD FONT
FONT ID=#####
End saving the data.
Set data ID for saved data.
Save a macro.
Set macro ID for saved macro.
Save primary font.
Set primary font ID for saved font.
Save secondary font.
Set secondary font ID for saved font.
Save download font.
DELETE exit
NETWORK MODE
CONTINUE MODE
BUZZER SETTING
SCALABLE FONT
PRINT DENSITY
INPUT BUFFER exit
MACRO ID=#####
DATA ID=####
FONT ID=#####
FORMAT CARD
AUTO FF=OFF
FF SUPPRESS=OFF
TONER LOW=CONT exit
SET –> DELETE ALL exit
LOCK PANEL=OFF
PASS NO=###
WAIT TIME= 5s
CONTINUE=MANUAL
BUZZER=ON
FONT=ALL
■■■■■
❏❏❏❏❏
Set download font ID for saved font.
Exit to CARD OPERATION
Delete the selected macro.
Delete the selected data.
Delete the selected font.
Format the flash card.
Execute formatting the card.
Exit to FORMAT CARD
Exit to CARD OPERATION
ON or OFF
Enter pass number.
ON or OFF
1 to 99 seconds for AUTO ON
ON or OFF
CONT or STOP exit to NETWORK MODE
AUTO or MANUAL
ON or OFF
ALL, LJ4
Increase or decrease the print density. (15 levels)
Increase or decrease the input
SAVE SETTINGS exit
COUNT= 0
SAVE SETTING 1
SAVE SETTING 2 buffer capacity. (15 levels)
Save the current setting as #1
Save the current settings as #2 exit to ADVANCED MODE
Shows the number of printed pages.
Exit MODE.
4–10
CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL
MODE Switch Settings in BR-Script 2 Mode
The following table shows all the selections you can make with the MODE switch in the BR-Script 2 mode.
✒ Note
The mode menus and settings that can appear vary according to the current emulation mode, printer status, and any options that may be installed in the printer.
Mode Menu
INTERFACE MODE
Setting Menu Sub-Setting Menu Setting
Same as HP LaserJet 4+ Mode
(See 4-17.)
FORMAT MODE X OFFSET=0
(See 4-22.)
RESOLUTION MODE
(See 4-28.)
CARD OPERATION
(See 4-32.)
Y OFFSET=0 exit
RESOLUTION
APT SETTING
HRC SETTING
RESOLUTION=600
APT=OFF
HRC=MEDIUM
-500 (left) to +500 (right) dots
-500 (up) to +500 (down) dots
Exit to PAGE FORMAT MODE
300 or 600 dpi
ON or OFF
OFF, LIGHT, MEDIUM, or DARK exit Exit to RESOLUTION MODE
When the commercial flash memory card or the HDD card has not been formatted:
FORMAT CARD Format the flash memory card or the HDD card.
exit Exit to CARD OPERATION
CARD OPERATION
(See 4-32.)
When the commercial flash memory card or the HDD card has been formatted:
EXECUTE DATA Execute the data on the card.
DATA ID=##### exit
Execute the selected data.
Exit to EXECUTE DATA
CARD LIST
SAVE SAVE DATA
Print the contents of the card.
Send data to be saved.
DELETE exit
SET KEY--> END
DATA ID=##### exit
MACRO ID=#####
DATA ID=####
FONT ID=#####
FORMAT CARD
SET –> DELETE ALL exit
End saving the data.
Set data ID for saved data.
Exit to CARD OPERATION
Delete the selected macro.
Delete the selected data.
Delete the selected font.
Format the card.
Execute formatting the card.
Exit to FORMAT CARD
OPERATION
Exit to CARD OPERATION
4–11
USER’S GUIDE
Mode Menu (Continued)
ADVANCED MODE
(See 4-41.)
Setting Menu
NETWORK MODE
ERROR PRINT
CONTINUE MODE
BUZZER SETTING
PRINT DENSITY
INPUT BUFFER
SAVE SETTINGS exit
COUNT= 0
Sub-Setting Menu
LOCK PANEL=OFF
PASS NO=###
AUTO FF=OFF
WAIT TIME= 5s
FF SUPPRESS=OFF
TONER LOW=CONT exit
ERROR PRINT=OFF
CONTINUE=MANUAL
BUZZER=ON
■■■■■
❏❏❏❏❏
SAVE SETTING 1
SAVE SETTING 2
PAGE COUNTER
(See 4-48.) exit MODE
(See 4-48.)
Setting
ON or OFF
Enter pass number.
ON or OFF
1 to 99 seconds for AUTO ON
ON or OFF
CONT or STOP exit to NETWORK MODE
ON or OFF
AUTO or MANUAL
ON or OFF
Increase or decrease the print density. (15 levels)
Increase or decrease the input
buffer capacity. (15 levels)
Save the current setting as #1
Save the current settings as #2 exit to ADVANCED MODE
Shows the number of printed pages.
Exit MODE
4–12
CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL
MODE Switch Settings in HP-GL Mode
The following table shows all the selections you can make with the MODE switch in the HP-GL mode.
✒ Note
The mode menus and settings that can appear vary according to the current emulation mode, printer status, and any options that may be installed in the printer.
Mode Menu
INTERFACE MODE
Setting Menu
Same as LaserJet 4+ Mode
(See 4-17.)
FORMAT MODE
(See 4-20.)
PAGE FORMAT MODE
Sub-Setting Menu
PAPER=LETTER
(For 110/120V mode)
Setting
X OFFSET= 0
Y OFFSET= 0 exit
LETTER, LEGAL, A4, A5,
A6, B5, B6, EXECUTIVE,
COM10, MONARCH, C5, and DL
-500 (left) to +500 (right) dots
-500 (up) to +500 (down) dots
Exit to PAGE FORMAT
MODE
GRAPHICS MODE PEN SETTING
SETTING=PEN1 exit
SIZE #=3 dots
GRAY #=100% exit
CHARACTER SET
STANDARD SET
ANSI ASCII
PEN1 to 6
(Set size and gray
percentage for the selected
pen. )
1 to 10 dots (pen size in
dots)
(# is the selected pen
number. )
15, 30, 45, 75, 90, or 100%
(# is the selected pen
number. )
Exit to SETTING=PEN1–6
Exit to GRAPHICS MODE
RESOLUTION MODE
(See 4-28.) exit
RESOLUTION
HRC SETTING exit
ALTERNATE SET
ANSI ASCII exit
RESOLUTION=600
HRC=MEDIUM
Standard character set
See character sets on page
4-28.
Alternate character set
See character sets on page
4-28.
Exit to GRAPHICS MODE
Exit to FORMAT MODE
300 or 600 dpi
OFF, LIGHT, MEDIUM, or
DARK
Exit to RESOLUTION MODE
4–13
USER’S GUIDE
Mode Menu (Continued)
PAGE PROTECTION
Setting Menu
PROTECT=AUTO
(See 4-31.)
CARD OPERATION
Same as BR-Script mode
(See 4-32.) exit
ADVANCED MODE
Same as HP LaserJet 4+ mode
(See 4-41.)
PAGE COUNTER
(See 4-48.)
COUNT= 0 exit MODE
(See 4-48.)
Sub-Setting Menu Setting
AUTO, OFF, LETTER, A4, or
LEGAL
Exit to CARD OPERATION
Shows the number of printed pages.
Exit MODE
4–14
CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL
Basic Operation Procedures
When you operate the MODE switch, remember the following basic steps:
1. Press the SEL switch to set the printer off-line.
2. Press the MODE switch to enter the MODE menus.
The first mode menu appears on the display.
INTERFACE MODE
• Press the ▲ or ▼ switch to scroll through the menus forward or backward. (Pressing the MODE switch allows forward scroll.)
INTERFACE MODE
← ▼ or ▲ →
FORMAT MODE
← ▼ or ▲ →
RESOLUTION MODE
← ▼ or ▲ →
…
• Press the SET switch to enter the next lower menu level of the selected menu.
Mode Menu
SET
→
Setting Menu
SET
→
Sub-Setting Menu
• Press the ▲ or ▼ switch to select the setting on the display.
I/F=PARALLEL
← ▼ or ▲ →
I/F=RS-232C
← ▼ or ▲ →
I/F=OPTION
← ▼ or ▲ →
…
• Press the SET switch to make the selected setting effective. Then you move to the next selection or exit to the upper menu level.
When you see “exit” and press the SET switch, you can exit from the current level of menu to the next higher level of the menu.
3. Advance to “exit MODE” and press the SET switch to exit from the mode menus to the off-line ready state.
Pressing the SEL switch any time in any level of the menus allows you to exit from the mode menus to the on-line state. The settings you have made with the SET switch before exit are effective.
4–15
USER’S GUIDE
Operation Example: Selecting the Parallel Interface
For this session, select the parallel interface manually as follows:
1. Press the SEL switch to set the printer off-line.
2. Press the MODE switch.
The display shows the first menu.
INTERFACE MODE
3. Press the SET switch.
When you enter the interface mode, the display first shows the current interface with the asterisk.
I/F=AUTO *
4. Press the ▲ or ▼ switch until the desired interface appears on the display.
I/F=PARALLEL
Display Message
I/F=PARALLEL
I/F=RS-232C
I/F=OPTION
I/F=AUTO
Interface Mode
Parallel interface
Serial interface
Optional interface for MIO card
Auto interface selection
✒ Note
The optional interface is available only when a commercial MIO compatible sharing/network card has been installed.
5. Press the SET switch to make the displayed selection effective.
An asterisk appears at the end of the display for a short time. Then the printer automatically exits from the setting menu to the interface menu.
INTERFACE MODE
4–16
CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL
6. Press the ▲ or ▼ switch until the exit menu appears on the display.
exit MODE
7. Press the SET switch.
Then the printer automatically returns to the off-line ready state.
INTERFACE MODE
The automatic interface selection has been factory set. If you want to select a specific interface manually, use the interface mode to set it.
Display Message
I/F=PARALLEL
I/F=RS-232C
I/F=OPTION
I/F=AUTO
Interface Mode
Parallel interface
Serial interface
Optional interface for MIO card
Auto interface selection
Select the setting menu and enter the sub-setting menu to change the setting as follows:
■ Automatic Interface Selection
When you use the automatic interface selection function, select the function on the display as follows:
I/F=AUTO
When you select this function with the SET switch, the display shows the next sub-setting menu as follows:
TIME OUT= 5s *
You need to set the time out for the auto interface selection from 1 to 99 seconds with the ▲ or ▼ switch: factory setting = 5 seconds. This time out is the duration during which the printer will not allow another automatic change to the interface.
4–17
USER’S GUIDE
Even if you choose the automatic interface selection, you need to set the communications parameters for the serial interface, high speed/bidirectional communications for the parallel interface, and the optional interface settings if the installed MIO card requires them. See the tables below.
For further information about automatic interface selection, see
“AUTOMATIC INTERFACE SELECTION” in Chapter 3 .
■ Parallel Interface
When you intend to use the bi-directional parallel interface, select the interface on the display as follows:
I/F=PARALLEL
When you use the parallel interface, you need to set the communications mode in the following sub-setting menu.
Display Message High Speed and Bi-directional Parallel
Communications
HIGH SPEED=ON
Turns on or off the high speed parallel communications.
BI-DIR=ON
Turns on or off the bi-directional parallel communications.
The above high-speed and bi-directional settings are used for the bi-directional parallel interface of this printer. The bi-directional parallel interface is compatible with the IEEE 1284 standard bi-directional parallel interface. Although it uses the same cable, hardware, and software as the bi-directional parallel interface, to use its enhanced capabilities—such as bi-directional communication between the computer and printer and faster transmission of data—you need a printer driver or software that supports these features. Check with your software vendor to see if your software supports bi-directional parallel features.
■ Serial Interface
When you intend to use the serial interface, be sure to select the same communications parameters on both the printer and computer. You must set them for the automatic interface selection, too.
4–18
CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL
Display Message Parameters Settings
BaudRate= 9600
Baud rate
(Data transfer speed)
150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800,
9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200 baud
CodeType=8 bits
Code type
(Data length)
Parity =NONE
Parity
(Data error check)
Stop Bit=1 bits
Stop bits
(Data separator)
Xon/Xoff=ON
Xon/Xoff
(Handshake protocol)
DTR(ER) =ON
(Effective when
Xon/Xoff=ON)
Data terminal ready
(ER)
7 bits or 8 bits
None, even, or odd
1 or 2
ON: DTR & Xon/Xoff handshake
OFF: DTR handshake only
ON: Makes DTR (ER) low when the buffer is full.
OFF: Does not make DTR (ER) low when the buffer is full.
DTR(ER) goes low only when the printer is off-line.
Robust Xon =OFF
(Effective when
Xon/Xoff=ON)
Robust Xon ON: Sends Xon while waiting.
OFF: Sends Xon once, when the printer status changes from off-line to on-line.
■ Optional Interface
If you have installed a commercial modular input/output (MIO) card in the printer, you can select the optional MIO interface in this mode. If the installed MIO card requires any optional interface settings, they appear under this menu. Set them, referring to the manual of the MIO card.
I/F=OPTION
✒ Note
This setting appears only when the MIO card has been installed. For
installation of the MIO card, see “MODULAR I/O CARD” in Chapter 5 .
4–19
USER’S GUIDE
FORMAT MODE
ORIENTATION
When you select “ORIENTATION”, you can set portrait or landscape orientation.
✒ Note
The ORIENTATION selection is effective in the HP LaserJet 4+, EPSON
FX-850, and IBM Proprinter XL modes. It does not work in other emulation modes.
This printer can print pages in portrait or landscape orientation. You can check the current orientation on the display.
PORTRAIT
LANDSCAPE
Fig. 4-4 Page Orientation
When you enter the setting mode, the display first shows the current orientation with an asterisk.
ORI=PORTRAIT *
Press the ▲ or ▼ switch until the desired orientation appears on the display.
Display Message
ORI=PORTRAIT
ORI=LANDSCAPE
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Press the SET switch to make the displayed selection effective.
An asterisk appears at the end of the display for a short time. Then the printer automatically exits from the setting mode to the FORMAT
MODE.
4–20
CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL
When portrait has been selected, the display may look as follows:
00 READY 001P T1
When landscape has been selected, the display may look as follows:
00 READY 001L T1
AUTO MODE
✒ Note
The settings in this mode menu are effective in the HP LaserJet 4+, EPSON
FX-850, and IBM Proprinter XL modes. They do not appear in other emulation modes.
The page/line termination is set in this mode.
Display Message
AUTO LF =OFF
Setting Auto Mode
ON CR
→ CR+LF
AUTO CR =OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
CR
→ CR
LF
→ LF+CR, FF → FF+CR, VT → VT+CR
LF
→ LF, FF → FF, VT → VT
AUTO WRAP =OFF
ON Line feed and carriage return occur when the printer position reaches the right margin.
OFF
AUTO SKIP =ON
AUTO MASK =OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
No line feed and carriage return occur when the printer position reaches the right margin.
Form feed occurs when the printer position reaches the bottom margin.
No form feed occurs when the printer position reaches the bottom margin.
The printer ignores the top and bottom margin settings you make with the control panel. The page length is automatically set to 11” for letter or A4-size paper and to 14” for legal-size paper.
The printer operates according to the margin settings you make with the control panel.
4–21
USER’S GUIDE
✒ Note on “AUTO MASK”
When you use application software in non-HP modes, be sure to set “AUTO
MASK” to ON. When you use letter- or A4-size paper, the top and bottom 2 lines are masked and they do not appear on the printout.
The auto modes are subject to the current emulation mode.
O : The auto modes can be set.
X : The auto modes cannot be changed and no setting appears.
— : The auto modes are not available.
AUTO Mode
AUTO LF
AUTO CR
AUTO WRAP
AUTO SKIP
AUTO MASK
Printer Emulation (Factory settings in bold print)
HP
LaserJet 4+
EPSON
FX-850
IBM
Proprinter XL
O OFF
O OFF
O OFF
X ON
O OFF
O OFF (Note)
O OFF
O ON
—
X ON
—
O OFF
X ON
—
O OFF
✒ Note
In the IBM emulation mode, FF codes are always followed by a CR code.
PAGE FORMAT MODE
✒ Notes
The settings in this mode menu vary as follows:
•
All settings are effective in the HP LaserJet4+, EPSON FX-850, and
IBM Proprinter XL modes.
•
The X and Y (vertical and horizontal) offsets are effective in the BR-
Script 2 mode. Other settings are not effective and they do not appear in this mode.
•
The paper size and the X and Y (vertical and horizontal) offsets are effective in the HP-GL mode. Other settings are not effective and they do not appear in this mode.
4–22
CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL
The following settings can be made in this mode:
Display Message Page Format Mode
PAPER =LETTER
Set cut sheet paper size to letter, A4, legal,
B5, A5, B6, A6, or executive, or envelope size to COM10, Monarch, C5, or DL.
LEFT M = 0C P
Set the left margin at column 0-126 at 10cpi.
RIGHT M = 80C P
Set the right margin at column 10-136 at
10cpi. See “List of Factory Settings” in this chapter.
TOP M =0.5" P
Set the top margin at a distance from the top edge of the paper: 0, 0.33, 0.5, 1.0, 1.5, or
2.0 inches. factory setting = 0.33 (Non-
HP), 0.5 (HP)
BOTTOM M=0.5" P
Set the bottom margin at a distance from the bottom edge of the paper: 0, 0.33, 0.5, 1.0,
1.5, or 2.0 inches. factory setting = 0.33
(Non-HP), 0.5 (HP)
LINES = 60L P
Set the number of lines per page from 5 to
128 lines. See “List of Factory Settings” in this chapter.
The letter “P” in the display messages indicates that the page orientation is portrait. The letter “L” is displayed when it is landscape.
Display Message
X OFFSET= 0
Y OFFSET= 0
Page Format Mode (Continued)
Move the print start position (at the upper left corner on pages) horizontally up to
-500 dots to the left or +500 dots to the right in 300dpi dot unit increments: factory
setting = 0.
Move the print start position (at the upper left corner on pages) vertically up to -500 dots downward or +500 dots upward in
300dpi dot increments: factory setting = 0.
4–23
USER’S GUIDE
✒ Notes
When you make settings in PAGE FORMAT MODE, note the following:
•
The letter size has been factory set for 110/120V model. The A4 size has been factory set for 220/240V model.
• When you use a smaller size of paper than that specified in the PAGE
FORMAT MODE, be sure that the print area is smaller than the paper size, or the inside of the printer will get stained with toner. It is recommended that you perform a test before actual use: for this test, you could use a letter or A4 size of paper to see the printed area is completely inside the paper size you are going to use. This simple test will help prevent toner from being incorrectly applied to the inside of your printer, which may cause later print jobs to be smudged with toner.
• The factory settings of the right/left margins and lines vary according to the paper size and orientation. See the tables below.
• The top and bottom margins have been factory set to 0.5” in the HP emulation mode and to 0.33” in the non-HP emulation modes.
•
The setting margins are subject to the current page orientation. The display shows the current orientation with “P” for portrait and “L” for landscape.
•
Images offset outside the print area are not printed.
■ About Right and Left Margins
The settings range of the right and left margins are subject to the page orientation as follows. The right margin should be placed 10 columns greater than the left margin: minimum text width = 10 columns.
If the orientation is changed, the margin settings are restored to the factory settings. If the paper size is changed and the right and left margins exceed the paper size, they are restored to the factory settings: if they do not exceed the paper size, they remain effective.
The following table shows the settings range in columns. The factory settings are printed in bold.
Paper Size Portrait
Letter
A4
Legal
Landscape
Left Margin Right Margin Left Margin Right Margin
0-70 10-80 0-96 10-106
0-70
0-70
10-78-80
10-80
0-103
0-126
10-113
10-136
4–24
CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL
■ About Line Settings
Setting the number of lines/page automatically sets the line spacing or line feed pitch. If the paper size is changed, the number of lines/page changes accordingly. The new setting is calculated with the following expression and the remainder, if any, is ignored. However, the line feed pitch and the top and bottom margins remain effective.
# of Lines/Page =
Page Length – (Top Margin + Bottom Margin)
Line Feed Pitch [Vertical Motion Index (VMI)]
The setting of lines/page is subject to the current paper size and orientation.
For example, when letter-sized paper is used, the printer can print 60 lines per page in portrait orientation. If the orientation is changed, the line settings are restored to the factory settings in that orientation.
The following tables show the factory settings in each emulation mode.
In HP Mode
Orientation
Size Portrait
Letter
A4
Legal
60 lines
64 lines
78 lines
Landscape
45 lines
43 lines
45 lines
In Non-HP Modes
Orientation
Size Portrait
Letter
A4
Legal
62 lines
66 lines
80 lines
Landscape
47 lines
45 lines
47 lines
✒ Note
When you use application software in the non-HP modes, the recommended settings are as follows:
•
•
•
Left margin = column 0
Right margin = Max. value
Auto MASK ON
GRAPHICS MODE
✒ Note
The settings in this mode menu are effective only in the HP-GL mode. They do not appear in any other emulation modes.
Since the HP-GL emulation mode is for a plotter, you can select the plotter pens, the pen size and percentage of gray in this mode menu.
4–25
USER’S GUIDE
Display Message
PEN SETTING
CHARACTER SET
Graphics Mode
Set the size and percentage of gray separately for six plotter pens.
Set the standard and alternate character sets.
✒ Note
In most cases, the application software controls the above graphics mode settings, so you do not need to set them in this menu with the MODE switch.
The software or command setting overrides the switch setting.
Select the setting menu and enter the sub-setting menu to make the settings as follows:
■ Pen Setting
When you select “PEN SETTING,” you can set the size and percentage of gray for each plotter pen. You can make settings separately for six pens.
Select the pen with the ▲ or ▼ switch and enter the menu with the SET switch.
SETTING=PEN1
After you select the pen, advance to the sub-setting menu for size or graypercentage selection with the ▲ or ▼ switch and enter the menu with the
SET switch.
When the following message appears, the pen size can be set from 1 dot to
10 dots with the ▲ or ▼ switch:
SIZE 1=3 dots *
When the following message appears, the shades of gray can be set to 15,
30, 45, 75, 90, or 100% with the ▲ or ▼ switch.
GRAY 1=100% *
4–26
CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL
✒ Notes
• When another pen is selected, the display shows the selected pen with the number after “SIZE’ or “GRAY.”
• Whichever resolution, 300 or 600 dpi, you have selected, the pen size takes effect in units of 300 dpi.
■ Character Set
When you select “CHARACTER SET,” you can select the standard and alternate character sets used in the HP-GL emulation mode.
Enter the sub-setting menu and select the menu for the standard or alternate character set with the ▲ or ▼ switch:
To set the standard character set, select the following message:
STANDARD SET
or
To set the alternate character set, select the following message:
ALTERNATE SET
Then press the SET switch to show the following message:
ANSI ASCII *
Change the character set with the ▲ or ▼ switch and make the selection effective by pressing the SET switch. For specific character sets, see
“SYMBOL/CHARACTER SETS” in Appendix.
4–27
USER’S GUIDE
Character Sets in HP-GL Emulation Mode
ANSI ASCII
(Factory setting)
9825 CHR. SET
FRENCH/GERMAN
SCANDINAVIAN
SPANISH/LATIN
JIS ASCII
ROMAN8 EXT.
ISO IRV
ISO SWEDISH
ISO SWEDISH:N
ISO NORWAY 1
ISO GERMAN
ISO FRENCH
ISO U.K.
ISO ITALIAN
ISO SPANISH
ISO PORTUGUESE
ISO NORWAY 2
RESOLUTION MODE
The resolution, advanced photoscale technology (APT) and high resolution control (HRC) can be set in this mode menu.
Display Message
RESOLUTION
APT SETTING
HRC SETTING
Resolution Mode
Set the resolution of the printer.
Set the APT function. This menu appears only in the BR-Script 2 mode.
Set the HRC function.
Select the setting menu and enter the sub-setting menu to make the settings as follows:
■ Resolution
When you select “RESOLUTION,” you can choose a resolution of 300 or
600 dots per inch (dpi) on this printer. You can set the resolution in this mode according to your requirement.
The printer may not be able to print large files because of the resolution and the printer’s memory. The higher the resolution and file size, the more memory is required.
4–28
CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL
Display Message Resolution
RESOLUTION=600
Set the resolution to 600 dpi. (Factory setting)
RESOLUTION=300
Set the resolution to 300 dpi.
Select the print resolution in this mode according to the resolution required for your print jobs as shown below:
Resolution Setting in Resolution Mode
Print Jobs 300 dpi 600 dpi
300 dpi For optimum print quality For mixing 300 dpi bitmaps with 600 dpi
600 dpi Not recommended For optimum print quality
✒ Note
Even if you set the resolution to 600 dpi in this mode, the printer may not be able to print large files at 600 dpi because of insufficient memory. However, it automatically decreases the resolution to 300 dpi to print them. While the printer is printing, the display prompts “01 PR300 … .”
If the printer cannot print files even at 300 dpi, the “MEMORY FULL”
error occurs. See “TROUBLESHOOTING” in Chapter 7 .
This automatic resolution decrease function works in the BR-Script 2 mode and other emulation modes with the page protection on. See also
When you want to print without decreasing the resolution, you must expand the memory capacity of the printer to 6-Mbytes or more.
Expand the memory capacity referring to the table below. It shows the minimum size of memory required in the BR-Script 2 mode.
Paper Size 300 dpi 600 dpi
Letter or A4 4 Mbytes 6 Mbytes
Legal 4 Mbytes 6 Mbytes
(Duplex printing) 4 Mbytes 10 Mbytes
For memory expansion, see “RAM EXPANSION” in Chapter 5 or consult the dealer where you purchased the printer.
4–29
USER’S GUIDE
■ APT Setting
When you select “APT SETTING,” you can use the advanced photoscale technology (APT). This function offers photographic fine grayscale on graphics. APT setting is available only at 600 dpi resolution in BR-Script 2 mode and it requires 6 MB of RAM to enjoy APT printouts. When you set
APT=ON, the setting of high resolution control (HRC) is unavailable.
Display Message
APT =OFF
APT =ON
Advanced Photoscale Technology
Cancel the advanced photoscale technology.
(factory setting)
Effectuate the advanced photoscale technology.
■ HRC Setting
When you select “HRC SETTING,” you can set the high resolution control
(HRC). This function is a special function that offers improved print quality of characters and graphics that conventional laser printers cannot attain with resolutions of 300 or 600 dpi. You can set this function in this mode.
Display Message
HRC =OFF
HRC =LIGHT
HRC =MEDIUM
HRC =DARK
High Resolution Control
Cancel the high resolution control.
Set the high resolution control to the light level.
Set the high resolution control to the medium level. (Factory setting)
Set the high resolution control to the dark level.
The following figures show jagged print with the high resolution control set to “OFF” on the left and clear and crisp print with the control set to
“MEDIUM” on the right.
4–30
HRC = OFF
Fig. 4-5 High Resolution Control
HRC = MEDIUM
CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL
The high resolution control has been factory set to “MEDIUM.” The
“LIGHT” or “DARK” setting might be better depending on the selected print density. Choose the best setting for clear and crisp printouts.
To check the printout with the high resolution control, perform the test print with the TEST switch. For operation, see “TEST Switch.”
When you perform “TEST PRINT,” the printer prints the test pattern including a block of lines. If the high resolution control is “OFF,” the lines in the test pattern are unsmoothed or stepped as shown in the left figure below. The pattern will be smoother if the high resolution control is set to
LIGHT, MEDIUM, or DARK. Choose an HRC setting and perform the test print so that stepped lines become unnoticeable.
HRC = OFF HRC = MEDIUM
Fig. 4-6 High Resolution Control in Test Printout
PAGE PROTECTION
✒ Note
The setting in this mode menu is effective in the HP LaserJet 4+, EPSON
FX-850, IBM Proprinter XL, and HP-GL modes. It does not appear in the
BR-Script 2 mode.
If print images are too complex to print, the printer may print them out in parts or only on part of the page. If this occurs, the printer loses print data and shows the following message:
31 PRINT OVERRUN
4–31
USER’S GUIDE
The page protection function reserves additional memory so that the printer can create the entire page image in memory before physically printing it out.
This function can be set for letter, A4, or legal size paper. Select the paper size for page protection.
Display Message Page Protection
PROTECT=AUTO
Page protection on only when it is necessary.
(Factory setting)
PROTECT=LETTER
Page protection on for letter size paper.
PROTECT=A4
PROTECT=LEGAL
PROTECT=OFF
Page protection on for A4 size paper.
Page protection on for legal size paper.
Page protection off
To protect pages, you need the memory capacity as shown in the following table:
Protection
Off
Letter or A4
Legal
(Duplex)
300 dpi
2 Mbytes
2 Mbytes
3 Mbytes
4 Mbytes
600 dpi
2 Mbytes
6 Mbytes
6 Mbytes
10 Mbytes
✒ Notes
When you use the page protection function, note the following:
• When you want to print at 600 dpi with the page protection function on, be sure to expand the memory capacity to a minimum of 6 Mbytes; or the resolution is automatically reduced to 300 dpi for printouts.
• If the function setting is changed, all download fonts and macros— including permanent ones—are cleared. If the memory is too low to protect pages, page protection does not take effect.
CARD OPERATION
✒ Notes
•
BE SURE TO TURN OFF THE PRINTER POWER SWITCH
BEFORE INSTALLING OR REMOVING THE FLASH MEMORY
CARD OR HDD CARD, OR THE CARD WILL BE DAMAGED.
•
The settings in this mode menu are effective only when you have installed a flash memory card or a HDD card in the card slot of the printer and you have selected the HP LaserJet 4+, HP-GL, or BR-Script
2 mode. They do not appear when the printer has no card or is in any other emulation mode.
4–32
CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL
•
If you turn the printer off or remove the flash memory card or the HDD card while data is being written onto or deleted from the card, all the data on the card may be lost.
• If the write protect switch of the flash memory card or the HDD card is on, this mode menu does not appear.
Be sure to install a commercial flash memory card or HDD card in the upper card slot of the printer. For installation, see “FONT CARTRIDGE/CARD,
FLASH MEMORY/HDD CARD” in Chapter 5.
When you are in this mode menu, you can save macros and fonts in the installed flash memory card or the HDD card.
The sub-setting menus displayed in this mode menu vary according to the state of the installed card.
When the installed card is not formatted:
When you enter this mode menu with the flash memory card or the HDD card installed but not formatted by this printer, you must first format the card.
Display Message
FORMAT CARD exit
Card Operation
Format a new flash memory card or HDD card.
Exit to CARD OPERATION
When the display shows “FORMAT CARD,” press the SET switch to format the installed card.
After the printer finishes formatting the card, you exit to the “CARD
OPERATION” menu.
✒ Notes
•
•
If the card is formatted, data that has been previously written is erased.
It takes ten or more seconds to format a 2-Mbyte flash memory card or
HDD card. The more the capacity of the card, the longer time it takes to format the card.
4–33
USER’S GUIDE
When the installed flash memory card or HDD card is formatted:
When you enter this mode menu with the formatted flash memory card or
HDD card installed, the display shows the following menus:
Display Message
EXECUTE DATA
CARD LIST
SAVE
DELETE
Flash Operation
Select the data ID and execute the selected data. This menu appears only when any data has been saved on the card.
Print out the contents of the flash memory card or the HDD card. This menu appears only when anything has been saved in the card.
Save received data, macros, and fonts.
Delete items from the card.
✒ Note
A common use of the flash memory is with FORMS software packages.
With these commercially available software packages you have an option to send a form to the printer without any data. After you send the form to the printer, you may save the form in the flash memory as a Macro. Then the next time you want to print this form, you would setup your FORMS software package to SEND DATA ONLY - USE FORM IN PRINTER. This process would save you anything from 1 to 4 minutes per print job.
Select the setting menu and enter the sub-setting menu to change the settings as follows:
■ Execute Data
✒ Note
This menu appears only when data has been saved on the card.
When you select “EXECUTE DATA,” you can execute any of the data saved in the SAVE DATA mode.
When you enter this sub-setting menu with the SET switch, the printer prompts you to select the ID of the data.
DATA ID=#####
Select the ID with the ▲ or ▼ switch and press the SET switch again, so that the printer executes the selected data.
4–34
CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL
■ Card List
When you select “CARD LIST” and you press the SET switch, the printer automatically loads paper and starts printing the contents of the installed flash memory card or HDD card. You can check the contents and the unused capacity of the card.
■ Save
When you select “SAVE” and you press the SET switch, you can enter the following sub-setting menus to save the macros and fonts in the installed card:
Display Message
SAVE DATA
Save Menu
Save data that the printer will receive and set its ID.
SAVE MACRO
Save a macro. This menu appears only in the
HP LaserJet 4+ emulation mode.
PRIMARY FONT
SECONDARY FONT
Save the secondary font selected with the
FONT switch. This menu appears only in the
HP LaserJet 4+ emulation mode.
DOWNLOAD FONT
Save the primary font selected with the
FONT switch. This menu appears only in the
HP LaserJet 4+ emulation mode.
Save a download font. This menu appears only in the HP LaserJet 4+ emulation mode and BR-Script 2 mode.
✒ Note
If the capacity of the card becomes low while macros and fonts are being saved, the display shows the “CARD FULL” error message and they cannot be saved. Use a new card or delete unnecessary macros and fonts from the card. The CARD LIST displays the contents and the used capacity.
4–35
USER’S GUIDE
• Save Data
You can send data and save it on the card. In this mode, any kind of data such as PCL data, BR-Script 2 data, and command strings can be saved.
When you select “SAVE DATA” and you press the SET switch, the display shows the following guide menus.
SET KEY --> END
This message prompts you to press the SET switch again so that the printer exits from the data reception status when you finish sending data.
Send data from your computer.
✒ Notes
When you send data to be saved on the card, it is temporarily stored in the
RAM of the printer. Note the following:
•
If the received data exceeds the RAM capacity, a memory full error occurs. You can clear this error with the CONTINUE switch. When this error occurs, only part of the image has been stored in RAM, therefore, you cannot save the data to the card.
• The printer is reset to ensure as much capacity as possible in RAM. If any data remains, it is printed out first.
After you have finished sending data, press the SET switch again, so that the printer exits from the data reception status.
When you exit from the data reception status, you see the following message on the display:
DATA ID=#####
Select the data ID with the ▲ or ▼ switch and press the SET switch. The printer will then save the received data with the ID on the card.
✒ Notes
• When you see an asterisk on the display, the ID number has been used for other data or a macro. If you select the used ID number, the old data or macro is erased and replaced with the new data.
• Once the data is saved, you can execute it with “EXECUTE DATA” or with a data execution command.
• The data saved in the SAVE DATA mode can not be run with the macro execution command in HP LaserJet 4+ emulation.
4–36
CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL
• Save Macro
✒ Note
The “SAVE MACRO” menu appears only in the HP LaserJet 4+ emulation mode.
If you have downloaded a macro in the printer’s memory, you can save the macro on the installed flash memory card or HDD card.
If a macro has been downloaded in the printer’s memory and you press the
SET switch at “SAVE MACRO,” the printer prompts you to select the ID of the macro.
MACRO ID=#####
Select the ID with the ▲ or ▼ switch and press the SET switch again, so that the printer saves the macro with the selected ID.
✒ Note
When you see an asterisk on the display, the ID number has been used for another macro or data. If you select the used ID number, the old macro or data is erased and replaced with the new macro.
You can execute a macro with the macro execution command.
• Primary Font or Secondary Font
✒ Note
The “PRIMARY FONT” and “SECONDARY FONT” menus appear only in the HP LaserJet 4+ emulation mode.
If you have selected the primary or secondary font with the FONT switch, you can save the font on the installed flash memory card or HDD card.
When you press the SET switch at “PRIMARY FONT” or “SECONDARY
FONT,” the printer prompts you to select the ID of the font.
FONT ID=#####
4–37
USER’S GUIDE
Select the ID with the ▲ or ▼ switch and press the SET switch again, so that the printer saves the font with the selected ID.
✒ Note
When you see an asterisk on the display, the ID number has been used for another font. If you select the used ID number, the old font is erased and replaced with the new one.
Whatever font you have selected with the FONT switch, the printer saves the font as a bitmapped font as long as the print size is no more than 24 points, so that the printer can print it faster than when they are not saved. It is recommended that you save the scalable font you frequently use for faster printing.
Since the flash memory card or the HDD card is in the upper card slot A of the printer and fonts stored in the card behave in the same way as they would if they were in a dedicated Font Card, you can select the saved fonts as “SLOTFONT A” with the FONT switch or the font selection command from your software. For font selection, see “FONT Switch” in Chapter 4.
You can check the saved fonts by printing the list of fonts with the TEST
switch. See “TEST Switch” in Chapter 4 .
✒ Notes
When you save the primary or secondary font, note the following:
•
The font is temporarily stored in the RAM of the printer before it is saved on the card. If the font data exceeds the RAM capacity, a memory full error occurs. You can clear this error with the CONTINUE switch.
As not all the font data has been stored in RAM, you cannot save the font to the card. When the font data is saved, the printer is reset to ensure as much capacity as possible in RAM. If any data remains, it is printed out.
• If you have saved the font at 600-dpi resolution and change the printer resolution to 300 dpi, the printer cannot print the saved font.
4–38
CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL
• Download Font
✒ Notes
• The “DOWNLOAD FONT” menu appears only in the HP LaserJet 4+ emulation mode.
•
Be sure to print out the list of download fonts with the TEST switch and check the download font ID on the list before you enter this menu. You need to select the font in this menu with the same number you see on the list.
If you have downloaded a font into the printer memory, you can save it on the flash memory card or the HDD card.
The printer prompts you to select the download font ID that you can find from the font list. Press the SET switch to move the cursor to the ID and select it with the ▲ or ▼ switch.
FONT ID=#####
✒ Note
The download font IDs do not appear when fonts have not been downloaded.
After you select the download font ID, press the SET switch, so that the printer saves the selected download font. Vector or bitmapped fonts are saved in the format of the original font.
Once you save the download font in the card, you do not need to download the font every time you need it.
Since the flash memory card or the HDD card is in the upper card slot A of the printer, you can select the saved fonts as “SLOTFONT A” with the
FONT switch or the font selection command from your software. For font selection, see
You can check the fonts saved on the card by printing the list of fonts with
the TEST switch. See “TEST Switch” in Chapter 4 .
✒ Note
When the fonts on the HDD card are selected in a print job, they are copied into the printer RAM. It may tend to cause the printer memory full error because those fonts occupy some RAM space. It is recommended to install optional SIMM to use the downloaded fonts on the HDD card.
4–39
USER’S GUIDE
■ Delete
When you select “DELETE” and press the SET switch, you can enter the following sub-setting menus to delete macros and fonts or format the installed flash memory card or HDD card:
Display Message Save Menu
MACRO ID=#####
Delete the selected ID macro.
DATA ID=#####
FONT ID=#####
FORMAT CARD
Delete the selected ID data.
Delete the selected ID font.
Format the flash memory card or the HDD card.
• Macro
When you press the SET switch at “MACRO ID=#####,” the cursor moves to the ID number. The printer prompts you to select the ID number of the macro to be deleted.
MACRO ID=#####
Select the ID number with the ▲ or ▼ switch and press the SET switch, so that the printer deletes the selected macro.
• Data
When you press the SET switch at “DATA ID=#####,” the cursor moves to the ID number. The printer prompts you to select the ID number of the data to be deleted.
DATA ID=#####
Select the ID number with the ▲ or ▼ switch and press the SET switch, so that the printer deletes the selected data.
• Font
When you press the SET switch at “FONT ID=#####,” the cursor moves to the ID number. The printer prompts you to select the ID number of the font to be deleted.
4–40
CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL
FONT ID=#####
Select the ID number with the ▲ or ▼ switch and press the SET switch, so that the printer deletes the selected font.
• Format Card
You can format the flash memory card or the HDD card to delete its contents. Instructions are in the following menu:
FORMAT CARD
When you press the SET switch in this menu, the printer asks if you want to delete all contents of the card:
SET-->DELETE ALL
Press the SET switch to start formatting the card.
When you want to cancel formatting, move to the following menu with the
▲ or ▼ switch and press the SET switch.
exit
ADVANCED MODE
NETWORK MODE
Display Message Network Mode
LOCK PANEL=OFF
Turns on or off lock panel function.
AUTO FF=ON
Turns on or off auto form feed.
FF SUPPRESS=OFF
Turns on or off the form feed suppress function.
TONER LOW=CONT
Select the printer’s action when “TONER
EMPTY” is detected
■ Lock panel
If someone other than you has changed the panel switch settings and you do not know about it, the printer may not print as you expected or it may not print at all.
4–41
USER’S GUIDE
To cope with this problem, you can lock or unlock the panel switches with your pass number as follows:
Display Message Lock Panel
LOCK=OFF
Unlock the panel switches of the printer.
(Factory setting)
LOCK=ON
Lock the panel switches of the printer.
Even if you lock the panel switches, you can use the SEL, FORM FEED,
COPY, CONTINUE, RESET and TEST switches. You can only check the settings of the other switches, but you cannot change them. To change them, unlock the panel switches.
When you lock or unlock the panel switches as above, you need to enter a
3-digit pass number.
PASS NO=***
Change the number with the ▲ or ▼ switch and move to the next digit with the SET switch. After you finish entering your 3-digit pass number, the panel switches are locked or unlocked.
✒ Note
Do not forget your pass number that you have used to lock the panel switches. If you enter a wrong number, you cannot unlock them. The display shows the following message:
INCORRECT!!
■ Auto Form Feed
If unprinted data remains in the printer’s memory, the DATA lamp stays on.
You need to print out the remaining data with the FORM FEED switch. See
“FORM FEED Switch” in Chapter 4 .
The auto form feed you can set in this mode menu allows you to print out the remaining data without pressing the FORM FEED switch.
4–42
CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL
You can turn on or off the auto form feed in this mode menu as follows:
Display Message
AUTO FF=OFF
AUTO FF=ON
Auto Form Feed
Turn off the auto form feed. You need to press the FORM FEED switch every time data remains in the printer’s memory.
(Factory setting)
Turn on the auto form feed. Every time data remains in the printer’s memory, the auto form feed takes place after the wait time set as below.
When you turn on the auto form feed as above, you need to set the wait time in the following sub-setting menu:
Display Message
WAIT TIME= 1s
.
.
WAIT TIME=99s
Wait Time
Set the wait time for the auto form feed.
The printer automatically prints out the remaining data after the set wait time.
The wait time can be set from 1 to 99 seconds.
■ Form Feed Suppress
You can turn on or off the form feed suppress function in this mode menu as follows:
Display Message Form Feed Suppress
FF SUPPRESS=OFF
Turn off the form feed suppress function.
(Factory setting)
FF SUPPRESS=ON
Turn on the form feed suppress function.
If pages contain no print data, the printer would normally print blank pages.
When you turn this function on, you can suppress printing blank pages.
When the printer is used in the network environment, it may print a blank page at the end of each print job. When you turn on this function, the printer does not print blank pages.
4–43
USER’S GUIDE
■ Toner Low
You can select the printer’s action when “TONER EMPTY” is detected.
Display Message Network Mode
TONER LOW=CONT
Continue printing if the “TONER EMPTY” error occurs. (Factory setting)
TONER LOW=STOP
Stop printing if the “TONER EMPTY” error occurs.
ERROR PRINT
✒ Note
The setting in this mode menu is effective only in the BR-Script 2 mode. It does not appear in any other emulation modes.
You can turn on or off the error print mode in this mode.
Display Message Error Mode
ERROR PRINT=ON
Turn on the error mode so that the printer prints an error if it occurs.
ERROR PRINT=OFF
Turn off the error mode so that the printer does not print an error if it occurs. (Factory
setting)
CONTINUE MODE
If any recoverable error occurs including “Toner Empty,” it can be cleared with the CONTINUE switch. The CONTINUE switch function is selected with this mode setting.
Display Message Continue Mode
CONTINUE=MANUAL
Select the manual or auto error recovery mode. Press the CONTINUE switch to clear errors. (Factory setting)
CONTINUE=AUTO
Select the auto error recovery mode. The printer automatically clears recoverable errors. You need not press the CONTINUE switch.
4–44
CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL
BUZZER SETTING
You can turn the buzzer of this printer on or off. If any errors occur and the buzzer is turned on, the printer beeps to alert you. If it is turned off, it does not sound to alert you.
Display Message
BUZZER=ON
BUZZER=OFF
Buzzer
Turn on the buzzer. (Factory setting)
Turn off the buzzer.
SCALABLE FONT
✒ Note
The setting in this mode menu is effective only in the HP LaserJet 4+ mode.
It does not appear in any other emulation modes.
Since this printer has many scalable fonts, some application programs may not be able to handle them correctly. When the HP LaserJet 4+ emulation mode has been selected, the printer may print a different font rather than the font you have selected with your program (or the font selection command).
To cope with this font problem, you can restrict the font selection by this command as follows:
Display Message
FONT=ALL
FONT=LJ4
Scalable Font
All scalable fonts of this printer can be selected with the font selection command.
For fonts, see “RESIDENT FONTS” in
Appendix. (Factory setting)
Scalable fonts of this printer other than the following can be selected with the font selection command: Atlanta, Bermuda
Script, PC Brussels, Copenhagen, Germany,
Portugal, Calgary, San Diego, and US
Roman.
Even if you restrict the font selection as above, you can select among all the scalable fonts with the FONT switch. The setting in this mode menu merely restricts the font selection command.
4–45
USER’S GUIDE
PRINT DENSITY
You can increase or decrease the print density with the ▲ or ▼ switch in this mode menu as follows:
Display Message
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
:
■■
■
Print Density
The more black squares, the darker the print density. The black squares indicate the density level.
The density can be set to 15 levels.
(Factory setting = ■■■■■■■■ )
INPUT BUFFER
You can increase or decrease the capacity of the input buffer with the ▲ or
▼ switch in this mode menu. A larger capacity allows the printer to receive data from the computer faster.
Display Message Input Buffer
❏❏❏❏❏❏❏❏❏❏❏❏❏❏❏ The more squares, the larger the capacity
❏❏❏❏❏❏❏❏❏❏❏❏❏❏ of the input buffer. The squares indicate
: the level of the capacity but not the size in
:
❏❏
❏
Mbytes.
The capacity can be set 15 levels.
(Factory setting =❏❏❏❏❏)
After you change the input buffer capacity (make sure you press SET switch), be sure to turn off the printer and then turn it on again. The setting takes effect the next time you turn on the printer.
✒ Notes
•
•
The set capacity is not changed even if the emulation mode is changed.
The actual capacity of the input buffer varies according to the installed
RAM. If the RAM capacity is small, the input buffer capacity may not be increased.
• When you select duplex printing, it requires more memory to run duplex printing. If you set a large input buffer and the remaining memory is not enough to run duplex printing, the print speed may decrease in duplex printing, the 600dpi resolution may decrease to 300dpi, or the printer may automatically change duplex printing to simplex printing. In such a case, you need to install optional SIMM memory or set a smaller input buffer size in this mode.
4–46
CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL
INPUT 14M
SIZE
5 SQUARES 4M
100K
51K 1 SQUARE 30K
30K
7M 14M 26M
RAM SIZE
Fig. 4-7 Input buffer size
SAVE SETTINGS
Suppose you share this printer with others who want different panel switch settings or you use the printer with different settings.
Since you can save the current settings in the printer’s memory, you can easily reset the printer to your necessary settings after they are changed. For resetting the printer, see
Use the panel switches to set the configuration of the printer to your needs and then enter this mode menu to save your settings. Two sets of user settings can be saved in the printer as follows:
Display Message User Setting
SAVE SETTING 1
Save the current settings as No. 1 in the printer’s memory.
SAVE SETTING 2
Save the current settings as No. 2 in the printer’s memory.
If you want to check the user settings, you can print out a list of the settings
with the TEST switch. See “TEST Switch” in Chapter 4 .
✒ Note
No user settings have been factory set.
4–47
USER’S GUIDE
PAGE COUNTER
You can check the total number of printed pages with this mode. When you enter this mode, the display shows the number for a short time and automatically moves to “exit MODE” menu.
COUNT= 861
EXIT MODE
When you finish setting your desired item in the mode menus, advance to the following message:
exit MODE
Press the SET switch to exit from the mode menus to the off-line ready state.
✒ Note
Remember that you can exit from the mode menu any time with the SEL switch. After you make a setting effective with the SET switch, press the
SEL switch. You will exit from the mode menu to the on-line ready state.
The settings you have changed with the SET switch are effective after a quick exit.
4–48
CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL
FONT Switch
Pressing the FONT switch allows you to select fonts and symbol/character sets.
✒ Notes
When you use the FONT switch, note the following:
•
The FONT switch is effective in the HP LaserJet 4+, EPSON FX-850, and IBM Proprinter XL modes. However the settings are subject to the current emulation mode. Note that the FONT switch does not work in the BR-Script 2 mode.
• If the application software supports font and symbol/character set selection, you do not need to set them with the FONT switch. The software or command setting overrides the switch setting.
• If you want to use optional fonts other than the printer’s resident fonts, be sure to install a font cartridge/card that has your desired fonts. The printer automatically selects the font that has exactly the same or similar characteristics as those you set through the software or with a command.
If the installed font cartridge/card happens to have a font of similar characteristics, the printer will print with an unexpected font.
•
You can store the fonts you require on a flash memory card or HDD card only in the HP LaserJet 4+ mode or BR-Script 2 mode when one is installed. See “CARD OPERATION.”
Setting the Font and Symbol Set in the HP LaserJet 4+ Mode
When the HP LaserJet 4+ emulation mode has been selected, the font and symbol set can be set separately as the primary or secondary font.
The display shows the following setting menus:
PRIMARY FONT SELECT FONT p
Set the primary font.
SYMBOL SET p
Set the symbol set.
TABLE PRINT p
Print the code table.
exit
Exit
4–49
USER’S GUIDE
SECONDARY FONT SELECT FONT s
Set the secondary font.
SYMBOL SET s
Set the symbol set.
TABLE PRINT s
Print the code table.
exit
Exit
To select the font and symbol set in the HP LaserJet 4+ mode, follow these steps:
1. Press the SEL switch to set the printer off-line.
2. Press the FONT switch.
The display shows the following menu.
PRIMARY FONT
3. Press the ▲ or ▼ switch to select the primary or secondary font setting menu.
PRIMARY FONT
SECONDARY FONT
For this session, select the primary font setting menu.
4. Press the SET switch.
The display shows the font setting menu. You can skip the font setting menu and advance to the symbol set setting menu with the ▲ or ▼ switch. For this session, go to the next step.
SELECT FONT p
✒ Note
The last lowercase letter “p” or “s” indicates the primary or secondary font setting mode. If you select the secondary font setting mode, the display shows “s” in the following messages.
4–50
CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL
5. Press the SET switch.
When you enter the “SELECT FONT” menu, you can select the internal font, optional slot font, or permanent download font. The display shows the following message.
INTERNAL FONT p*
Press the ▲ or ▼ switch until the desired font source appears on the display.
Display Message Font Source
INTERNAL FONT
Internal font of the printer
SLOTFONT A
Optional card font in the upper slot
A
SLOTFONT B
Optional cartridge font in the lower slot B
PERMANENT FONT
Permanent download font defined in the HP emulation mode
Since these steps instruct you to select the standard font, select the
“INTERNAL FONT” message.
✒ Notes
When you select the optional fonts or permanent download fonts, note the following:
• If the optional font cartridge/card is not installed, the optional font cannot be selected. No selection appears on the display.
•
If permanent fonts are not downloaded in the HP emulation mode or another emulation mode is selected, they cannot be selected. No selection appears on the display.
•
The list you can print out with the TEST switch helps you to select the optional fonts or permanent download fonts. See
chapter or
“Selecting the Optional Fonts” in Chapter 5 .
6. Press the SET switch.
When you enter the font setting mode, the display first shows the current font with an asterisk.
BROUGHAM p*
7. Press the ▲ or ▼ switch until the desired font appears on the display.
4–51
USER’S GUIDE
See “List of Fonts” on page 4-59 .
8. Press the SET switch to make the displayed selection effective.
The steps you follow vary according to the font type, scalable or bitmapped.
■ If you select a resident bitmapped font (Letter Gothic 16.66) or optional bitmapped fonts, the display shows the symbol set setting menu.
SYMBOL SET p
Go to step 9.
■ If you select resident scalable fonts or optional scalable fonts, the display shows the font style setting menu.
BROUGHAM p
⇓
The display changes to the font style menu.
BROUGHAM Reg p*
Press the ▲ or ▼ switch until the desired style appears on the display.
Display Message Font Style
........ Lt
Light
........ Reg
Regular, Roman, Book, or
Antique
........ Bd
Bold or Demi
........ Xb
Extrabold
........ It
Italic or Oblique
✒ Note
The style indication appears after the font name and the style name differs according to the font name. The italic or oblique indication can appear after other style indication: “BdIt” indicates a bold italic font, “LtIt” indicates a light italic font, etc.
4–52
CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL
Press the SET switch to make the displayed selection effective, then the display shows the font size setting menu.
✒ Note
When you have selected fixed-pitch fonts, you set the font size by the character pitch (width). When you have selected proportional spacing fonts, you set the font size in points (height). The display shows “PITCH” or
“POINT” accordingly. The following displays show “PITCH” to simplify instructions.
PITCH= 10.00 *
Press the ▲ or ▼ switch until the desired font size appears on the display.
Press the SET switch to make the displayed selection effective.
The blinking cursor then moves to the decimal part of the number.
Press the ▲ or ▼ switch until the desired decimal number appears on the display.
PITCH= 16.66
Press the SET switch to make the displayed selection effective.
The display then shows the symbol set setting menu.
SYMBOL SET p
9. Press the SET switch.
When you enter the symbol set setting mode, the display first shows the current symbol set with an asterisk.
ROMAN 8 p*
10. Press the ▲ or ▼ switch until the desired symbol set appears on the display.
See “List of Symbol/Character Sets” on page 4-60 .
11. Press the SET switch to make the displayed selection effective.
The display then shows the next menu.
4–53
USER’S GUIDE
TABLE PRINT p
12. Press the SET switch to start printing the code table of the selected font, or press the ▲ or ▼ switch to skip this menu.
The display shows the exit menu.
exit
13. Press the SET switch to exit from the setting mode.
The printer returns to the off-line state.
Setting the Font and Character Set in the, EPSON FX-850, or
IBM Proprinter XL Mode
When the EPSON FX-850 or IBM Proprinter XL mode has been selected, the font and character set can be selected.
The display shows the following setting menus.
SELECT FONT
Select the font.
CHARACTER SET
Select the character set.
TABLE PRINT
Print the code table.
exit
Exit
To select the font and character set in the EPSON
FX-850 or IBM Proprinter XL mode, follow these steps:
1. Press the SEL switch to set the printer off-line.
2. Press the FONT switch.
The display shows the font setting menu. You can skip the font setting menu and advance to the character set setting menu with the ▲ or ▼ switch. For this session, go to the next step.
SELECT FONT
4–54
CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL
3. Press the SET switch.
When you enter the “SELECT FONT” menu, you can select the internal font, optional slot font, or permanent download font. The display shows the following message.
INTERNAL FONT *
Press the ▲ or ▼ switch until the desired font source appears on the display.
Display Message Font Source
INTERNAL FONT
Internal font of the printer
SLOTFONT A
Optional card font in the upper slot
A
SLOTFONT B
Optional cartridge font in the lower slot B
PERMANENT FONT
Permanent download font defined in the HP emulation mode
Since these steps instruct you to select the standard font, select the
“INTERNAL FONT” message.
✒ Notes
When you select the optional fonts or permanent download fonts, note the following:
• If the optional font cartridge/card is not installed, the optional font cannot be selected. No selection appears on the display.
•
If permanent fonts are not downloaded in the HP emulation mode or another emulation mode is selected, the permanent fonts cannot be selected. No selection appears on the display.
•
When you select the optional font or download font, press the SET switch to enter the sub-menu. After you select your desired one with the
▲ or ▼ switch, press the SET switch again. The list you can print out with the TEST switch helps you to select the optional fonts or permanent download fonts. See “TEST switch” in this chapter or
“Selecting the Optional Fonts” in Chapter 5 .
4. Press the SET switch.
When you enter the font setting mode, the display first shows the current font with an asterisk.
4–55
USER’S GUIDE
BROUGHAM *
5. Press the ▲ or ▼ switch until the desired font appears on the display.
See
“List of Fonts” on page 4-59 .
6. Press the SET switch to make the displayed selection effective.
The steps you follow vary according to the font type, scalable or bitmapped.
■ If you select a resident bitmapped font (Letter Gothic 16.66) or optional bitmapped fonts, the display shows the character set setting menu.
CHARACTER SET
Go to step 7.
■ If you select the resident scalable fonts or optional scalable fonts, the display shows the font style setting menu.
BROUGHAM
⇓
The display changes to the font style menu.
BROUGHAM Reg *
Press the ▲ or ▼ switch until the desired style appears on the display.
Display Message Font Style
........ Lt
Light
........ Reg
Regular, Roman, Book, or
Antique
........ Bd
Bold or Demi
........ Xb
Extrabold
........ It
Italic or Oblique
4–56
CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL
✒ Note
The style indication appears after the font name and the style name differs according to the font name. The italic or oblique indication can appear after any style indication: “BdIt” indicates a bold italic font, “LtIt” indicates a light italic font, etc.
Press the SET switch to make the displayed selection effective, then the display shows the font size setting menu.
✒ Note
When you have selected fixed-pitch fonts, you set the font size by the character pitch (width). When you have selected proportional spacing fonts, you set the font size in points (height). The display shows “PITCH” or
“POINT” accordingly. The following displays show “PITCH” to simplify instructions.
PITCH= 10.00 *
Press the ▲ or ▼ switch until the desired font size appears on the display.
Press the SET switch to make the displayed selection effective.
Then the blinking cursor moves to the decimal part of the number.
Press the ▲ or ▼ switch until the desired decimal number appears on the display.
PITCH= 16.66
Press the SET switch to make the displayed selection effective.
The display then shows the character set setting menu.
CHARACTER SET
7. Press the SET switch.
When you enter the character set setting mode, the display first shows the current character set with an asterisk.
4–57
USER’S GUIDE
US ASCII *
✒ Note
The character set varies according to the current emulation mode. The above display shows the factory setting in the EPSON FX-850 emulation mode.
8. Press the ▲ or ▼ switch until the desired character set appears on the display.
See “List of Symbol/Character Sets” on page 4-60.
9. Press the SET switch to make the displayed selection effective.
Then the display shows the next menu.
TABLE PRINT
10. Press the SET switch to start printing the code table of the selected font, or press the ▲ or ▼ switch to skip this menu.
Then the display shows the exit menu.
exit
11. Press the SET switch to exit from the setting mode.
The printer returns to the off-line state.
4–58
CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL
Display Message
BROUGHAM
LETTERGOTHIC
OCR-A
OCR-B
LETTERGOTH16.6
LTRGOTH16 LTN2
LTRGOTH16 LTN5
PcTENNESSEE
OKLAHOMA
CONNECTICUT
CLEVELAND Cd
PcBRUSSELS
UTAH
UTAH CONDENSED
AntiqueOAKLAND
GUATEMALA
MARYLAND
ALASKA
HELSINKI
BR SYMBOL
TENNESSEE
W DINGBATS
GERMANY
SAN DIEGO
BERMUDA SCRIPT
US ROMAN
ATLANTA
COPENHAGEN
PORTUGAL
CALGARY
List of Fonts
.
For specific characters in resident bitmapped and scalable fonts, see
“SYMBOL/CHARACTER SETS” in Appendix.
Font
Scalable Brougham
Scalable LetterGothic
Bitmapped OCR-A 12 cpi
Bitmapped OCR-B 12 cpi
Bitmapped Letter Gothic 16.66 cpi
Bitmapped Letter Gothic 16.66 cpi
ISO 8859-1 Latin2
Bitmapped Letter Gothic 16.66 cpi
ISO 8859-1 Latin5
Scalable PC Tennessee
Scalable Oklahoma
Scalable Connecticut
Scalable Cleveland Condensed
Scalable PC Brussels
Scalable Utah
Scalable Utah Condensed
Scalable Antique Oakland
Scalable Guatemala Antique
Scalable Maryland
Scalable Alaska
Scalable Helsinki
Scalable BR Symbol
Scalable Tennessee
Scalable W Dingbats
Scalable Germany
Scalable San Diego
Scalable Bermuda Script
Scalable US Roman
Scalable Atlanta
Scalable Copenhagen
Scalable Portugal
Scalable Calgary
4–59
USER’S GUIDE
List of Symbol/Character Sets
The symbol sets and character sets are subject to the current emulation mode. For specific symbol/character sets, see “SYMBOL/CHARACTER
SETS” in Appendix.
HP LaserJet 4+ EPSON
ROMAN 8
*
ISO LATIN1
ISO LATIN2
ISO LATIN5
US ASCII
*
GERMAN
UK ASCII I
FRENCH I
PC-8
PC-8 D/N
DANISH I
ITALY
PC-850 SPANISH
PC-852 SWEDISH
PC-8 TURKISH JAPANESE
WINDOWS LATIN1 NORWEGIAN
WINDOWS LATIN2 DANISH II
WINDOWS LATIN5 UK ASCII II
LEGAL FRENCH II
ISO 2 IRV
ISO 4 UK
DUTCH
SOUTH AFRICAN
ISO 6 ASCII PC-8
ISO10 SWE/FIN PC-8 D/N
ISO11 SWEDISH PC-850
ISO14 JISASCII PC-852
ISO15 ITALIAN PC-860
ISO16 POR PC-863
ISO17 SPANISH PC-865
ISO21 GERMAN PC-8 TURKISH
ISO25 FRENCH
ISO57 CHINESE
ISO60 NOR v1
ISO61 NOR v2
ISO69 FRENCH
ISO84 POR
ISO85 SPANISH
HP GERMAN
HP SPANISH
VENTURA MATH
VENTURA INTL
VENTURA US
PS MATH
PS TEXT
MATH-8
PI FONT
MS PUBLISHING
WINDOWS 3.0
MC TEXT
DESKTOP
IBM
PC-8
*
PC-8 D/N
PC-850
PC-852
PC-860
PC-863
PC-865
PC-8 TURKISH
✒ Note
The factory settings are indicated by an asterisk “ * ” in the table above.
4–60
CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL
FORM FEED Switch (REPRINT Switch)
The FORM FEED switch works in two ways according to the DATA lamp status.
Form Feed
When the printer is off-line and there is data remaining in the printer memory, the DATA lamp comes on. Pressing the FORM FEED switch executes a form feed and prints out the remaining data. The display may look as follows:
01 PRINT 001P T1
If you set the number of copies with the COPY switch and press the FORM
FEED switch during copy printing, the printer suspends the form feed operation and the display shows the following message:
07 FF PAUSE
Pressing the SEL switch again resumes the form feed operation.
When no data remains in the printer memory and you press the FORM
FEED switch, the printer ignores this switch operation and the display shows the following message:
No Data !!!
✒ Note
If you want the printer to print out the remaining data automatically, you can
set the auto form feed function with the MODE switch. See “AUTO
Reprint Function
You can reprint the same page of data without sending it from the computer again. When you press the FORM FEED switch with the DATA lamp off, the printer reprints the same page. You can use this function in order to recover printing when a paper jam has occurred.
After printing is finished, set the printer off-line and press the FORM FEED switch once, so that the printer prints the last page of data.
4–61
USER’S GUIDE
When you press the FORM FEED switch one or more times during reprinting, you can set the number of pages to reprint. The printer reprints the same page the number of times you press the switch.
✒ Note
The reprint data remains in the printer’s memory until the printer is reset or the emulation, or some settings are changed. After you have reprinted confidential data, be sure to reset the printer to clear it from the printer’s memory.
4–62
CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL
CONTINUE Switch
If there is a problem with the printer, it automatically suspends printing and goes off-line. Pressing the CONTINUE switch may ignore the error and resume printer operation.
The function of this switch varies according to the CONTINUE mode set with the MODE switch.
Since the CONTINUE mode has been factory set to MANUAL, you need to press the CONTINUE switch to recover from a printer error message. If you set the mode to AUTO, the printer attempts to resume the operation without pressing the CONTINUE switch.
For further information, see
“CONTINUE MODE” in Chapter 4 .
✒ Note
The CONTINUE switch is not a cure-all. The printer cannot recover from some errors. Take corrective action, referring to the error message. See
“TROUBLESHOOTING” in Chapter 7 .
4–63
USER’S GUIDE
SWITCHES IN SHIFT MODE
You can control the basic printer operations and make various printer settings also in the SHIFT mode. Functions available in the SHIFT mode are labeled with the indications just below the panel switches.
Fig. 4-8 Switches in SHIFT Mode
✒ Note
The factory settings are printed in bold in this section.
SHIFT Switch
When you hold the SHIFT switch down with the printer off-line, you can change settings with the panel switches in the SHIFT mode. Since the shift state is not locked, you need to hold it down and press the switch to get access to the corresponding shifted function labeled under the switch.
4–64
CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL
EMULATION Switch
This printer has been factory set with the automatic emulation selection function on. The printer can select the emulation mode automatically when it receives data from the computer.
When you want to set the emulation mode manually, hold down the SHIFT switch and press the EMULATION switch. Then you enter the setting mode where you change the emulation.
To set the emulation mode, follow these steps:
1. Press the SEL switch to set the printer off-line.
2. Hold down the SHIFT switch and press the EMULATION switch.
When you enter the setting mode, the display first shows the current emulation mode with an asterisk.
AUTO *
3. Press the ▲ or ▼ switch until the desired emulation mode appears on the display.
Display Message
HP LaserJet 4+
BR-Script 2
HP-GL
Emulation Mode
HP LaserJet 4+
BR-Script level 2 mode
HP-GL Plotter Mode
EPSON FX-850
EPSON FX-850
IBMProprinterXL
IBM Proprinter XL
AUTO
Auto Emulation Selection
4. Press the SET switch to make the displayed selection effective.
When you select any specific emulation mode other than “AUTO,” an asterisk appears at the end of the display for a short time. Then the printer automatically exits from the setting mode to the off-line state.
When you select “AUTO,” the sub-item “Time Out” for the automatic emulation selection appears on the display. Go to the next step.
4–65
USER’S GUIDE
5. Set “Time Out” with the ▲ or ▼ switch.
TIME OUT= 5s *
This time out is the duration during which the printer will not allow an automatic emulation change. You can set it from 1 second to 99 seconds: the factory setting is 5 seconds.
6. Press the SET switch.
The next sub-item “EPSON/IBM” appears on the display.
EPSON/IBM=EPSON*
7. Select EPSON or IBM with the ▲ or ▼ switch.
Since the printer cannot distinguish between the EPSON and IBM emulation modes, you need to select the EPSON or IBM emulation even in the AUTO mode.
When the printer receives data from the computer, it automatically selects the emulation mode in any of the following combinations:
EPSON/IBM Priority EPSON IBM
Auto Selection Mode HP LaserJet 4+
BR-Script 2
HP-GL
EPSON FX-850
HP LaserJet 4+
BR-Script 2
HP-GL
IBM Proprinter XL
8. Press the SET switch.
The next sub-item “KEEP PCL” appears on the display.
KEEP PCL=OFF
This function is for permanent macros and fonts downloaded in the HP
LaserJet 4+ mode.
9. Turn on or off the “KEEP PCL” function with the ▲ or ▼ switch.
When you do not need to use the permanent macros and fonts in the HP
LaserJet 4+ mode, turn this function off. When you use them, you can turn it on.
4–66
CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL
If the function is turned on, the downloaded macros and fonts are kept in the printer’s memory until the printer is turned off, so that they are not cleared by switching the emulation to the BR-Script 2 mode.
✒ Note
The “KEEP PCL” function reserves free space in the printer’s memory and may cause a memory full error. If a memory full error occurs, expand the memory capacity or turn off this function.
10. Press the SET switch.
The “exit” message appears on the display.
11. Press the SET switch again.
The printer exits from the setting mode to the off-line state.
✒ Note
When you use the automatic emulation selection, try it with your application software or network server. If the function does not work properly, select a particular emulation mode manually. You can use the following commands to select the emulation on the network.
Commands Hex Emulation
ESC CR H 1B 0D 48 HP LaserJet 4+
ESC CR AB 1B 0D 41 42 BR-Script 2
ESC CR GL 1B 0D 47 4C HP-GL
ESC CR E 1B 0D 45 EPSON FX-850
ESC CR I 1B 0D 49 IBM Proprinter XL
About Emulation Modes
This printer has the following emulation modes:
■ HP LaserJet 4+ Mode
The HP LaserJet 4+ mode (or HP mode) is the emulation mode where this printer emulates the Hewlett-Packard LaserJet 4+ laser printer. Since a large number of application software packages support this type of laser printer, your printer will operate at its optimum performance in this mode.
4–67
USER’S GUIDE
■ BR-Script 2 Mode
BR-Script is a Brother original page description language and it is a
PostScript ® language emulation interpreter. This printer supports level 2.
The BR-Script interpreter of this printer can control text and graphics on pages completely and satisfactorily.
Average users do not need to know much about PostScript ® language. If you want to obtain technical information about PostScript
®
commands, see the following commercial manuals:
• Adobe Systems Incorporated. PostScript
®
Language Reference
Manual, 2nd Edition. Menlo Park: Addison-Wesley Publishing
Company, Inc., 1990.
• Adobe Systems Incorporated. PostScript ® Language Program Design.
Menlo Park: Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, Inc., 1988.
• Adobe Systems Incorporated. PostScript ® Language Reference
Manual. Menlo Park: Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, Inc., 1985.
• Adobe Systems Incorporated. PostScript ® Language Tutorial and
Cookbook. Menlo Park: Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, Inc.,
1985.
■ HP-GL Mode
The HP-GL mode is the emulation mode where this printer emulates the
Hewlett-Packard plotter model HP-7475A. Since many graphics and CAD applications support this type of plotter, you can get more out of this printer working with your application software.
■ EPSON FX-850 and IBM Proprinter XL Mode
The EPSON FX-850 and IBM Proprinter XL modes are the emulation modes where this printer emulates the industry-standard dot matrix printers of respective manufacturers. Since most applications support these printers, you do not have to be concerned about compatibility.
4–68
CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL
ECONOMY Switch
TONER SAVE MODE
You can turn on or off the toner save mode as follows:
Display Message Toner Save Mode
TONER SAVE=OFF
Turn off the toner save mode.
(Factory setting)
TONER SAVE=ON
Turn on the toner save mode. The amount of toner on the paper decreases and the printed image may look light gray.
POWER SAVE MODE
You can turn on or off the power save mode as follows:
Display Message Power Save Mode
POWER SAVE=ON
Turn on the power save mode. The fixing assembly of the print engine is turned off after the specified time to save power.
(Factory setting)
POWER SAVE=OFF
Turn off the power save mode. The fixing assembly of the print engine is always powered on to keep its temperature at the specified level.
When you turn on the power save mode with the SET switch, the display shows the next sub-setting menu as follows:
TIME OUT=30m *
You need to set the time out for the power save mode from 1 to 99 minutes with the ▲ or ▼ switch: factory setting =30 minutes. The time out is the duration after which the fixing assembly of the print engine is turned off
(“SLEEP”) to save power.
When the power save mode is turned on, the printer turns on the fixing assembly again after it receives data from the computer. Since the fixing assembly must reach the specified high temperature, it takes a little longer time to start printing the first page.
4–69
USER’S GUIDE
FEEDER Switch
You can select the feeder, manual feed mode, or MP tray settings with the
FEEDER switch, and also select the duplex printing mode if the optional duplex printing unit is installed.
Display Message
FEEDER=AUTO
Feeder
Select a feeder or auto paper feed.
MP FIRST=OFF
Turns MP first on or off.
MANUAL FEED=OFF
Turns manual feed on or off.
MP TRAY SETTING
MP tray settings
MEDIA TYPE
DUPLEX MODE
Select print media
Selects duplex printing mode (only with the duplex option installed.)
You can check the current feeder and the duplex mode on the display.
When tray 1 has been selected, the display may look as follows:
00 READY 001P T1
When the multi-purpose tray and the duplex printing mode have been selected, the display may look as follows:
00 READY 001P
■
MP
The black square ■ indicates that duplex printing mode is selected.
When you want to change settings with the FEEDER switch, hold down the
SHIFT switch and press the FEEDER switch. You will then enter the setting mode where you change the feeder, manual feed mode, etc.
FEEDER
To select the feeder, follow these steps:
1. Press the SEL switch to set the printer off-line.
2. Hold down the SHIFT switch and press the FEEDER switch.
When you enter the setting mode, the display first shows the current feeder setting with the asterisk.
4–70
CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL
FEEDER=AUTO *
3. Press the ▲ or ▼ switch until the desired feeder appears on the display.
Display Message
FEEDER=AUTO
FEEDER=MP TRAY
FEEDER=TRAY1
FEEDER=TRAY2
Paper Feed Method/Paper Source
Auto paper feed
Cassette feed from multi-purpose tray (MP tray)
Upper paper cassette (Tray 1)
Lower paper cassette (Tray 2)
✒ Notes
When you select a feeder, note the following:
• The “FEEDER=TRAY2” message appears only when the optional lower tray unit has been installed.
• The FEEDER=AUTO setting allows you to optimize your printing environment. This setting allows a print job to continue uninterrupted when a paper out condition occurs. The default setting is AUTO. This setting allows a common printing situation: Loading the same size and type of paper in all paper trays. This allows your print job to continue without error if one of the paper trays becomes empty. The printer will automatically select another tray if one tray becomes empty.
•
When you select the FEEDER=AUTO, the printer automatically searches for the paper size you set with the MODE switch in the PAGE
FORMAT mode and loads the paper from the paper source that contains the selected size of paper. If all of the upper and lower paper cassettes and the multi-purpose tray contain different sizes of paper and one paper cassette runs out of paper, the printer stops printing without automatically changing to the other paper source to feed paper. It prevents a different size of paper from being printed by mistake.
• If you have the same size of paper loaded but of different type (i.e.:
FORM “A” in Tray 1, Form “B” in Multi-purpose Tray) it is recommended to change the feeder setting from AUTO to Tray 1. This setting will allow the printer to pause when a paper empty condition occurs, allowing you to load the correct type of paper, then press SEL to finish to print job.
4. Press the SET switch to make the displayed selection effective.
4–71
USER’S GUIDE
When you select “MP TRAY”, “TRAY1,” or “TRAY2,” an asterisk appears at the end of the display for a short time. Then the “exit” message appears on the display. Press the SET switch again, so that the printer exits from the setting mode to the off-line state.
When you select “AUTO”, the tray selection menu for the auto paper feed appears on the display. Go to the next step.
5. Change the tray combination and priority with the ▲ or ▼ switch. For example:
AUTO=T1>MP *
When “AUTO=T1>MP” is set, both tray 1 and the multi-purpose tray are selected but tray 1 will be selected first if the paper size in tray 1 and the page size for the printing job match each other.
6. Press the SET switch.
MP FIRST
The display shows the current setting for the MP FIRST mode for the multi-purpose tray with an asterisk.
MP FIRST=OFF *
1. Press the ▲ or ▼ switch to select on or off for the MP FIRST mode in the multi-purpose tray.
✒ Notes
•
When you want to print the first page on paper such as letterhead in the multi-purpose tray, and the following pages on paper such as plain paper in another tray, place a sheet for the first page on the multipurpose tray and select “MP FIRST=ON” in this menu. Then the printer first selects the multi-purpose tray regardless of the
“FEEDER=####” setting and then automatically switches to the feeder selected in the “FEEDER=####” menu after the multi-purpose tray becomes empty.
•
You can use the MP tray as a convenient temporary feeder by setting
MP FIRST=ON. When MP FIRST=ON is set, if you place paper on
MP tray, this paper will be printed, and if you do not place paper on MP tray, another tray will be selected according to the command or the
“FEEDER=####” setting.
4–72
CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL
•
You can set “MP FIRST=ON” so that you can use the MP tray paper first until it becomes empty and then switch to other paper sources which hold the same size of paper. You can set “MP FIRST=ON” for this purpose only when all the trays hold the same type and size of paper. When the MP tray paper size is different from paper in other trays, you must not select “ON” if you do not want to use MP tray paper.
2. Press the SET switch.
MANUAL FEED
The display shows manual feed mode with an asterisk as follows:
MANUAL FEED=OFF*
1. Press the ▲ or ▼ switch to turn the manual feed mode on or off.
2. Press the SET switch to make the setting effective.
✒ Note
When you select the “MANUAL FEED=ON”, note that the feeder set in the
“FEEDER=####” menu is ignored and the manual feed mode from the multi-purpose tray is selected. You must set “MANUAL FEED=OFF” so that the feeder selection in the “FEEDER=####” menu can be effective.
MP TRAY SETTING
1. The display then shows the MP tray setting menu. Press the SET switch to enter this menu.
Then the display shows the current paper size setting for the multipurpose tray with an asterisk.
MP SIZE=LETTER *
4–73
USER’S GUIDE
2. Press the ▲ or ▼ switch to select the paper size in the multi-purpose tray.
✒ Note
When you select the multi-purpose tray as a paper source, you must set the
“MP SIZE” manually since the tray cannot sense the size automatically.
3. Press the SET switch to make the displayed setting effective.
Then the display shows the current “PAPER IN” setting with the asterisk as follows:
PAPER IN=CONT *
4. Press the ▲ or ▼ switch to select the printer action to continue or stop during manual feed.
✒ Note
You can select the printer action either to continue or to stop printing when you select the manual feed with this switch or by a command. When you set
“PAPER IN=CONTINUE”, the printer feeds paper from the multi-purpose tray. When you set “PAPER IN=STOP”, the printer stops feeding paper until the SEL key is pressed. If you want to place the paper on the multipurpose tray after you make a print request from the PC, select the “PAPER
IN=STOP” so that the printer waits for the paper.
5. Press the SET switch to make the setting effective.
MEDIA TYPE
When you use any paper other than ordinary plain paper, such as thick bond paper, envelope, or transparency, the appropriate media type must be selected in the media type mode in order to get the best print quality.
To select a media type, follow these steps:
1. The display shows the following message:
MEDIA TYPE
4–74
CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL
2. Press the SET switch to enter the media type mode. The display then shows the current setting with an asterisk:
REGULAR *
3. Press the ▲ or ▼ switch to select regular, thick paper, or transparency.
4. Press the SET switch to make the setting effective.
✒ Notes
• Please do not forget to change the setting back after you print your special media with the setting changed.
•
•
Envelopes cannot be fed from Tray 2 although you can set them in it.
You must not load transparencies into Tray 1 or Tray 2. Please use the multi-purpose tray.
DUPLEX MODE
If the optional duplex printing unit has been installed, the duplex mode appears on the display as follows:
DUPLEX MODE
1. Press the SET switch to enter the duplex mode menu.
Then the display shows the current selection for the duplex printing or simplex printing (duplex off) with an asterisk as follows:
DUPLEX=OFF *
2. Press the ▲ or ▼ switch to select the duplex or simplex (duplex off), and press the SET switch.
When you set “DUPLEX=ON”, the display shows the current bind setting with an asterisk as follows:
BIND=LONG *
3. Press the ▲ or ▼ switch to select long edge binding or short edge binding.
4–75
USER’S GUIDE
BIND=LONG
Fig. 4-9 Binding
BIND=SHORT
4. Press the SET switch to exit the DUPLEX MODE.
The printer exits from the setting mode to the off-line state.
5. Press the SET switch again to exit the FEEDER switch setting mode to the printer off-line state.
✒ Note
The duplex printing unit can handle letter, A4, legal, executive, and B5 sizes of paper. It can not handle shorter sizes of paper than B5 (250mm-9.8
inches long).
4–76
CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL
COPY Switch
You can set the number of copies to print of the same page with the COPY switch. The computer will release from a printing job in a shorter time if you use this feature than when you set the copy print quantity with your application software. Check the current setting on the display.
When the number of copies has been set at 1, the display may look as follows:
00 READY 001P T1
When the number of copies has been set at 3, the display may look as follows:
00 READY 003P T1
✒ Note
If you send too many pages to be stored in the printer memory, part or all of the set pages or copies may not be printed.
To set the number of copies, follow these steps:
1. Press the SEL switch to set the printer off-line.
2. Hold down the SHIFT switch and press the COPY switch.
When you enter the setting mode, the display first shows the current setting with the asterisk.
COPY PAGES= 1 *
3. Press the ▲ or ▼ switch until the desired number appears on the display.
Display Message
COPY PAGES= 1
COPY PAGES= 2
...
COPY PAGES=999
# of Copies to Print Same Pages
1 page
2 pages
. . .
999 pages (max.)
4. Press the SET switch to make the displayed selection effective.
An asterisk appears at the end of the display for a short time. Then the printer automatically exits from the setting mode to the off-line state.
4–77
USER’S GUIDE
RESET Switch
You can reset the printer with the RESET switch. The print data that the printer has already received from the computer is cleared and the printer settings are restored to the user settings or factory settings.
The temporary download fonts and macro settings you set with commands in the HP LaserJet 4+ mode are also cleared.
When you want to reset the printer, hold down the SHIFT switch and press the RESET switch. You then enter the reset mode where you reset the printer.
To reset the printer, follow these steps:
1. Press the SEL switch to set the printer off-line.
2. Hold down the SHIFT switch and press the RESET switch.
When you enter the reset mode, the display shows the first reset mode item.
RESET PRINTER
3. Press the ▲ or ▼ switch until the desired reset mode appears on the display.
Display Message
RESET PRINTER
Reset Mode
Resets the printer and restores all printer settings–including command settings–to settings you have previously made with the panel switches.
RESET SETTING 1
Resets the printer and restores all
RESET SETTING 2
printer settings–including command settings–to the selected number (1-2) of user settings you have previously made with the
MODE switch.
FACTORY SETTINGS
Resets the printer and restores all printer settings–including command settings–to the factory settings. See “List of Factory
Settings.”
exit
Exits from the reset mode. The printer is not reset.
4–78
CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL
4. Press the SET switch to make the displayed selection effective.
The printer is reset according to the selected reset mode.
When the “RESET PRINTER” mode has been selected, the printer is reset showing the message alternately as follows:
08 RESET TO
→
USER SETTINGS
When the “RESET SETTING 1-2” mode has been selected, the printer is reset showing the message alternately as follows (# indicates the selected number of saved settings):
08 RESET TO
→
SETTING #
When the “FACTORY SETTINGS” mode has been selected, the printer is reset showing the message alternately as follows:
09 RESET TO
→
FACTORY SETTINGS
Then the printer automatically exits from the reset mode to the on-line state.
List of Factory Settings
The following table shows the factory settings initially set before shipment.
✒ Notes
• The settings are subject to the emulation mode. Effective modes are indicated in parentheses in the following table.
• The following settings cannot be restored to the factory settings with the
RESET switch in the “FACTORY SETTINGS” mode: INTERFACE
MODE, HRC SETTING, PAGE PROTECTION, SCALABLE FONT,
LOCK PANEL, and PAGE COUNTER, and local language for display messages.
•
The COPY setting is always restored to the factory setting when the printer is turned off and on again.
•
The user settings are overwritten after resetting to setting 1 or 2.
4–79
USER’S GUIDE
Switch
MODE
Item Sub-Item Factory Setting
INTERFACE MODE
FORMAT MODE
–
For AUTO mode
TIME OUT
I/F=AUTO
TIME OUT= 5s
For bi-directional PARALLEL interface
HIGH SPEED
BI-DIR
HIGH SPEED=ON
BI-DIR=ON
For RS-232C serial interface
Baud Rate
Code Type
Parity
Stop Bit
Xon/Xoff
DTR (ER)
Robust Xon
ORIENTATION (Except for BR-
Script 2)
BaudRate= 9600
CodeType=8 bits
Parity =NONE
Stop Bit= 1 bits
Xon/Xoff=ON
DTR (ER)=ON
Robust Xon=OFF
ORI=PORTRAIT
AUTO MODE (HP LaserJet4)
AUTO LF
AUTO CR
AUTO WRAP
AUTO SKIP
AUTO MODE (EPSON)
AUTO LF
AUTO CR
AUTO WRAP
AUTO MASK
AUTO MODE (IBM)
AUTO LF
AUTO CR
AUTO WRAP
AUTO MASK
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON (No indication)
ON (No indication)
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON (No indication)
OFF
4–80
Switch Item
MODE (continued)
FORMAT MODE (continued)
CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL
Factory Setting Sub-Item
PAGE FORMAT MODE (HP LaserJet4,
EPSON, & IBM)
PAPER LETTER
(For 110/120V model)
A4 (For 220/240V model)
LEFT M 0 (LETTER,
PORTRAIT)
0 (LEGAL, PORTRAIT)
0 (A4, PORTRAIT)
0 (LETTER,
LANDSCAPE)
0 (LEGAL,
LANDSCAPE)
0 (A4, LANDSCAPE)
0 (A5, LANDSCAPE)
0 (A6, LANDSCAPE)
RIGHT M
TOP M
BOTTOM M
80 (LETTER,
PORTRAIT)
80 (LEGAL,
PORTRAIT)
78 (A4, PORTRAIT)
106 (LETTER,
LANDSCAPE)
136 (LEGAL,
LANDSCAPE)
113 (A4, LANDSCAPE)
113 (A5, LANDSCAPE)
113 (A6, LANDSCAPE)
0.5” (HP)
0.33” (Non-HP)
0.5” (HP)
0.33” (Non-HP)
4–81
USER’S GUIDE
Switch
MODE
(continued)
Item
PAGE FORMAT
(continued)
FORMAT MODE (BR-Script 2)
FORMAT MODE (HP-GL)
Sub-Item
LINES (HP)
Factory Setting
60 (LETTER,
PORTRAIT)
78 (LEGAL,
PORTRAIT)
64 (A4, PORTRAIT)
64 (A5, PORTRAIT)
64 (A6, PORTRAIT)
45 (LETTER,
LANDSCAPE)
45 (LEGAL,
LANDSCAPE)
43 (A4, LANDSCAPE)
43 (A5, LANDSCAPE)
43 (A6, LANDSCAPE)
LINES (Non-HP) 62 (LETTER,
PORTRAIT)
80 (LEGAL,
PORTRAIT)
66 (A4, PORTRAIT)
66 (A5, PORTRAIT)
66 (A6, PORTRAIT)
47 (LETTER,
LANDSCAPE)
47 (LEGAL,
LANDSCAPE)
45 (A4, LANDSCAPE)
45 (A5, LANDSCAPE)
45 (A6, LANDSCAPE)
X OFFSET
Y OFFSET
X OFFSET=0
Y OFFSET=0
X OFFSET
Y OFFSET
X OFFSET=0
Y OFFSET=0
PAGE FORMAT MODE
PAPER LETTER
(For 110/120V model)
A4 (For 220/240V model)
X OFFSET
Y OFFSET
X OFFSET=0
Y OFFSET=0
GRAPHICS MODE (HP-GL)
PEN SETTING SIZE: 3 dots
GRAY: 100%
4–82
CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL
Switch Item
MODE (continued)
RESOLUTION MODE
Sub-Item Factory Setting
RESOLUTION
APT SETTING
HRC SETTING
–
RESOLUTION=600
APT=OFF
HRC=MEDIUM
PROTECT=AUTO PAGE PROTECTION
(Non-BR-Script2)
ADVANCED MODE
NETWORK MODE
LOCK PANEL
AUTO FF
For AUTO FF=ON
WAIT TIME
LOCK PANEL=OFF
AUTO FF=OFF
WAIT TIME= 5s
FF SUPPRESS FF SUPPRESS=OFF
TONER LOW TONER LOW=CONT
ERROR PRINT (BR-Script2) ERROR PRINT=OFF
CONTINUE MODE
BUZZER SETTING
SCALABLE FONT
(HP, EPSON, & IBM)
PRINT DENSITY
CONTINUE=MANUAL
BUZZER=ON
FONT=ALL
■■■■■■■■
❏❏❏❏❏
PAGE COUNTER
For any interfaces
INPUT BUFFER
–
FONT (HP)
PRIMARY FONT SELECT FONT
SYMBOL SET
SECONDARY FONT SELECT FONT
SYMBOL SET
FONT (EPSON)
FONT –
– CHARACTER SET
FONT (IBM)
FONT
CHARACTER SET
–
–
EMULATION
–
For AUTO mode
–
TIME OUT
EPSON/IBM
KEEP PCL
0
BROUGHAM
ROMAN8
BROUGHAM
ROMAN8
BROUGHAM
US ASCII
BROUGHAM
PC-8
AUTO
TIME OUT= 5s
EPSON/IBM=EPSON
KEEP PCL=OFF
4–83
USER’S GUIDE
Switch Item Sub-Item
ECONOMY
TONER SAVE MODE -
–
POWER SAVE MODE -
For POWER SAVE=ON
TIME OUT
FEEDER
FEEDER -
COPY
MP FIRST
MANUAL FEED
MP TRAY SETTING MP SIZE
MEDIA TYPE
DUPLEX MODE
–
LANGUAGE (FORM FEED +
POWER ON)
-
-
PAPER IN
DUPLEX
BIND
–
–
Factory Setting
TONER SAVE=OFF
POWER SAVE=ON
TIME OUT=30m
FEEDER=AUTO
For FEEDER=AUTO
AUTO=T1>T2>MP
MP FIRST=OFF
MANUAL FEED=OFF
MP SIZE=LETTER
(For 110/120V model)
MP SIZE=A4
(For 220V/240V model)
PAPER IN=CONT
REGULAR
DUPLEX=OFF
BIND=LONG
COPY PAGES=1
LANG=ENGLISH
4–84
CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL
TEST Switch
You can test the printer or print out the list of fonts with the TEST switch.
To do so, hold down the SHIFT switch and press the TEST switch. You will then enter the test mode where you may test the printer or print out the list of fonts.
To test the printer, follow these steps:
1. Press the SEL switch to set the printer off-line.
2. Hold down the SHIFT switch and press the TEST switch.
When you enter the test mode, the display shows the first test mode item.
DEMO PAGE
3. Press the ▲ or ▼ switch until the desired test mode appears on the display.
Display Message
DEMO PAGE
TEST PRINT
PRINT CONFIG
PRINT FONTS I
PRINT FONTS C
PRINT FONTS P exit
Test Mode
Prints out the demonstration.
Performs the printer test and prints out the test pattern.
Prints out the list of panel switch settings you have configured for the printer as user settings.
Prints out the list of internal or resident fonts.
Prints out the list of optional fonts stored in the font cartridge/card.
Prints out the list of permanent download fonts.
Exits from the test mode. The printer does not perform the test.
4–85
USER’S GUIDE
✒ Notes
The message “PRINT FONTS C” or “PRINT FONTS P” appears only when the optional font cartridge/card is installed in the font slot or permanent download fonts are stored in printer memory.
• If the optional font cartridge/card is installed, you can print out the list of optional fonts. Since the list shows the ID numbers specific to each optional font, it helps you to select them with the FONT switch. For further information, see “FONT Switch” in Chapter 4 and “FONT
CARTRIDGE/CARD, FLASH MEMORY/HDD CARD” in Chapter 5.
• If user-defined characters are already downloaded into the printer memory as permanent download fonts, you can print out the list of them.
For further information, see “FONT Switch” in Chapter 4 and Technical
Reference Manual that is optionally available.
4. Press the SET switch to make the displayed selection effective.
The printer prints out the test patterns or lists according to the selected test mode.
■ When the “DEMO PAGE” mode has been selected, the display shows the following message and the printer starts printing out the demonstration pattern.
06 DEMO PAGE
■ When the “TEST PRINT” mode has been selected, the display shows the following message and the printer starts printing out the test pattern.
05 TEST PRINT
■ When the “PRINT CONFIG” mode has been selected, the display shows the following message and the printer starts printing out the list of printer settings.
06 PRINT CONFIG
✒ Note
The printed list shows the panel switch settings you have made as user settings with the MODE switch. See “SAVE SETTINGS” in Chapter 4.
4–86
CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL
■ When the “PRINT FONTS” mode has been selected, the display shows the selected mode and the printer starts printing out the font list. The display may look like this:
06 PRINT FONTS I
When the printer finishes printing, it automatically exits from the test mode to the off-line state.
4–87
USER’S GUIDE
HEX DUMP MODE
This printer has a useful hex dump mode for checking the print data sent from your computer. The printer lists the print data in hexadecimal form.
To enter the hex dump mode, follow these steps:
1. Check the power state.
2. Operate the switches according to the power state.
• If the printer has been turned off, turn on the printer.
The printer starts the self-test and the display shows the following message.
04 SELF TEST
• If the printer has been turned on, reset the printer with the RESET switch.
1) Press the SEL switch to set the printer off-line.
2) Hold down the SHIFT switch and press the RESET switch.
The display will show “RESET PRINTER”.
3) Press the SET switch with the “RESET PRINTER” selected.
The printer begins its reset and the display shows the following message alternately.
08 RESET TO
→
USER SETTINGS
3. Press the CONTINUE/SHIFT switch.
The printer checks the CONTINUE/SHIFT switch at the end of self-test or printer reset. If the switch is held down, the printer enters the hex dump mode and goes on-line. The display will show the message “HEX
DUMP MODE” and the printer will return to the on-line state.
✒ Note
If the printer returns to the on-line state without displaying the message
“HEX DUMP MODE”, you did not press the CONTINUE/SHIFT switch
immediately after pressing the SET switch. Try the above steps once again.
4–88
CHAPTER 4 CONTROL PANEL
4. Send data from your computer.
When the printer receives data, it starts printing hexadecimal values of the received data.
To exit from the hex dump mode, follow these basic steps:
1. Press the SEL switch to set the printer off-line.
2. Reset the printer with the RESET switch.
Or turn off the printer, wait for a few seconds, and turn it on again.
4–89
CHAPTER 5 OPTIONS
CHAPTER 5
OPTIONS
LOWER TRAY UNIT (LT-1200/LT-1600)
Loading Paper from the Lower Paper Cassette
The lower tray unit is a device that functions as a third paper source which can contain a maximum of 500 sheets of paper (80 g/m 2 or 20 lbs). For the optional lower tray unit, consult the dealer where you purchased the printer.
Lower Tray Unit
Fig. 5-1 Loading Paper in the Lower Tray Unit
With the lower tray unit installed, load paper into the lower paper cassette in the same way as you do the upper paper cassette.
See
“Installing the Paper Cassette” in Chapter 2 .
The paper sizes available for the lower paper cassette are not the same for the upper paper cassette as shown below.
paper source available size the optional lower paper cassette (T2) cut sheet : letter, legal, A4 and Executive the multi-purpose tray
(MP) and the upper paper cassette (T1) all sources for duplex printing (DX) cut sheet : letter, legal, A4, ISO B5,
Executive, A5, ISO B6 and A6 envelope : COM 10 , Monarch, C5, DL and
ISO B5 cut sheet : letter, legal, A4, ISO B5(except
T2) and Executive
5–1
USER’S GUIDE
FONT CARTRIDGE/CARD, FLASH MEMORY/HDD CARD
Installing a Font Cartridge/Card, Flash Memory Card and HDD
Card
This printer has one slot for an optional font cartridge and one slot for an optional font card, flash memory card or HDD card.
If you install the optional font cartridge/card, you can use the fonts stored in them as well as resident fonts. For optional font cartridges/cards, consult the dealer where you purchased the printer.
If you install the optional flash memory card or HDD card, you can save macros and fonts on it. For flash memory card and HDD card operation and
information, see “CARD OPERATION” in Chapter 4 .
✒ Notes
• Do not install or remove cards with the printer power on, or you may lose all data from the card, or may seriously damage the card if you do this.
• For more information about the cards, consult the dealer where you purchased the printer.
Follow these steps to install or remove a cartridge/card:
1. Make sure that the printer is turned off.
If the printer is turned on, be sure to press the SEL switch to set the printer off-line. If data remains in the printer memory, the DATA lamp stays on. Press the FORM FEED switch to print out the remaining data, then the DATA lamp goes off. Turn off the printer.
2. Insert the font card, flash memory card or HDD card into the upper slot
A and the font cartridge into the lower slot B with the cartridge/card label facing to the left. Make sure they fit securely.
To remove the cartridge/card, pull them out of the slot with the printer turned off.
5–2
CHAPTER 5 OPTIONS
The following type of flash memory card can be installed:
• 512 Kbyte : Mitsubishi MF8513-GBDAT01
• 1 Mbyte : Mitsubishi MF81M1-GBDAT01
• 2 Mbyte
• 4 Mbyte
: Mitsubishi MF82M1-GBDAT01
: Mitsubishi MF84M1-G1EAT01
• 2 Mbyte
• 2 Mbyte
• 1 Mbyte
• 1 Mbyte
• 2 Mbyte
• 1 Mbyte
• 2 Mbyte
• 4 Mbyte
: Fujitsu MB98A81113-20
: Fujitsu MB98A81123-25
: Fujisoku JF1024A3-R03
: Toshiba MCM33708DFB
: Toshiba MCM33709DFB
: AMD AMC001FLKA
: AMD AMC002FLKA
: AMD AMC004FLKA
The following type of HDD card can be installed:
• 105 Mbyte, 170 Mbyte, 260 Mbyte : Calluna Technology /
Callunacard
A
B
Slot A
Fig. 5-2 Installing or Removing the
Cartridge or Card
Slot B
5–3
USER’S GUIDE
Selecting the Optional Fonts
After you have installed the optional font cartridge/card, you can select optional fonts by any of the following methods:
1. Through your application software
2. With a font selection command
3. With the FONT switch
When you select fonts through your application software, follow the instructions specific to your software. Refer to your software manual if you need assistance. When you select fonts with a font selection command, embed the font selection command in your program. See the Technical
Reference Manual, which is optionally available for this printer.
✒ Notes
When you select the fonts through your software or with a command, note the following:
•
You do not need to be concerned about the FONT switch setting. The software or command setting overrides the switch setting.
•
Be sure to install the font cartridge/card that has your desired fonts. The printer automatically selects the font that has exactly the same or similar characteristics as those you set through the software or with a command.
If the installed font cartridge/card happens to have a font of similar characteristics, the printer will print in an unexpected font.
To select fonts with the FONT switch, follow these basic steps:
1. Print out the list of optional fonts in the PRINT FONTS C mode with the SHIFT and TEST switches.
See “Printing the Test Pattern or Font List” in Chapter 2.
5–4
Font ID Number
2. Find the font slot and font ID number on the list.
CHAPTER 5 OPTIONS
Slot A or B
Fig. 5-3 Font ID Numbers on the Font List
3. Select the font with the FONT switch.
See “FONT Switch” in Chapter 4 .
5–5
USER’S GUIDE
MODULAR I/O CARD
This printer has a modular input/output (MIO) interface slot on the rear panel. This slot allows you to install a commercial MIO-compatible sharing/network card.
For more information about MIO cards, consult the dealer where you purchased this printer.
When you install the MIO card, follow these steps:
1. Turn off the printer and unplug the power cord from the wall socket.
✒ Note
Be sure to turn off the power to the printer before installing or removing the
MIO card.
2. Remove the two screws and cover plate from the MIO interface slot.
3. Unpack the MIO card and hold it on its edge.
✒ Note
Do not touch the card surface. If static electricity collects, it damages the card.
4. Insert the card until it is securely seated.
5 Secure the MIO card with the two captive screws on the card
6. Retain the cover plate and two screws removed in 2 in case you want to remove the MIO card later.
5–6
MIO Interface Slot
Fig. 5-4 Installing the MIO Card
MIO Card
CHAPTER 5 OPTIONS
RAM EXPANSION
This printer has 2 Mbytes or 4 Mbytes of memory standard and 2 slots for optional expansion memory. The memory can be expanded up to 66
Mbytes by installing commercially available single in-line memory modules (SIMMs). (The standard memory fitted can vary depending on the printer model and country.)
Minimum Memory Recommendation
(Including 2/4 Mbytes of internal memory)
■ HP LaserJet 4+, HP-GL, EPSON FX-850, and
IBM Proprinter XL emulation modes
Page Protect = Off
Letter/A4
300 dpi 600 dpi
2 Mbytes 2 Mbytes
Legal 2 Mbytes 2 Mbytes
Page Protect = On
Letter/A4
300 dpi 600 dpi
2 Mbytes 6 Mbytes
Legal 3 Mbytes 6 Mbytes
■ BR-Script 2 mode
Letter/A4
300 dpi 600 dpi
4 Mbytes 6 Mbytes
Legal 4 Mbytes 6 Mbytes
■ Duplex printing
300 dpi 600 dpi
HP LaserJet 4+ 4 Mbytes 10 Mbytes
BR-Script 2 4 Mbytes 10 Mbytes
5–7
USER’S GUIDE
The following capacity of a SIMM can be installed:
• 1 Mbyte HITACHI HB56D25632B-6A, -7A, -8A
MITSUBISHI MH25632BJ-7, -8
• 2 Mbyte HITACHI HB56D51232B-6A, -7A, -8A
MITSUBISHI MH51232BJ-7, -8
• 4 Mbyte HITACHI HB56A132BV-7A, -7AL, -7B, -7BL, -8AL, -8B,
-8BL
MITSUBISHI MH1M32ADJ-7, -8
• 8 Mbyte HITACHI HB56A232BT-7A, -7AL, -7B, -7BL
MITSUBISHI MH2M32EJ-7, -8, MH2M32DJ-7, -8
• 16 Mbyte TOSHIBA THM324000BSG-60, -70, -80
• 32 Mbyte TOSHIBA THM328020BSG-60, -70, -80
In general, the SIMM must have the following specifications:
Type: 72 pin and 32 bit or 36 bit output
Access Time: 80 nsec. or less
Capacity:
Height:
1, 2, 4, 8, 16 or 32 Mbyte
46mm (1.8 inches) or less
There are 40 bit output SIMMs for workstations. Such SIMMs do not fit this printer.
For SIMMs and installation, consult the dealer where you purchased the printer.
When you install SIMMs, follow these steps:
1. Turn off the printer and unplug the power cord from the wall socket.
✒ Note
Be sure to turn off the power to the printer before installing or removing the
SIMMs.
2. Open the top cover of the printer.
3. Push the tab located on the left inside the printer to unlock the left side cover.
5–8
Fig. 5-5 Unlocking the Left Side Cover
CHAPTER 5 OPTIONS
4. Remove the left side cover by sliding it to the rear of the printer.
Fig. 5-6 Removing the Left Side Cover
✒ Note
Be careful not to connect the network interface cable into the modular jack for options located inside the left side cover, or it may damage the printer.
5. Loosen the screws and then slide and remove the metal cover.
Screw(Yellow)
Fig. 5-7 Removing the Metal Cover
6. Unpack a SIMM and hold it on its edge.
✒ Note
Do not touch the memory chips or the board surface. If static electricity collects, it damages the memory.
5–9
USER’S GUIDE
7. Install as many SIMMs as you need.
• Set a SIMM into the slot at an angle.
• Push the tip gently towards the vertical until it clicks into place.
✒ Notes
•
When you install less than two SIMMs, be sure to install them in the order of slots 1and 2.
• When you install different capacities of SIMMs, be sure to install the larger capacity SIMMs in the lower socket and smaller capacity SIMMs in order in the upper sockets.
SIMM
Slot 2
Slot 1
Fig. 5-8 Installing the SIMMs
8. Refit the metal plate and secure it with the screws.
9. Refit the left side cover to the printer.
10. Plug in the power cord and turn on the printer.
If you have installed the SIMMs incorrectly, the printer prints a report to alert you.
5–10
CHAPTER 5 OPTIONS
DUPLEX UNIT (DX-1200/DX-1600)
The duplex unit is an optional device that allows printing on both sides of pages. When it is installed, you can select either duplex printing or simplex printing from the control panel or by software command. For more information about the control panel, see “FEEDER switch” in Chapter 4.
Be sure to install the following capacity of RAM to enjoy duplex printing, or the printer cannot manage all the data for duplex printing at 600 dpi resolution and automatically switches to simplex printing or decrease the resolution from 600 dpi to 300 dpi.
■ Duplex printing
300 dpi 600 dpi
HP LaserJet 4+ 4 Mbytes 10 Mbytes
BR-Script 2 4 Mbytes 10 Mbytes
✒ Notes
•
The Duplex unit can handle cut sheet paper of the sizes shown below
[Weight = 60 to 90 g/m 2 (16 to 24 lbs)].
• When the duplex unit is installed, the capacity of the upper paper cassette decreases as shown below.
• When the duplex unit is installed, legal size paper can not be loaded into the upper paper cassette with the standard paper guide. Be sure to replace it with the duplex paper guide for the both simplex and duplex printing.
• When the printer automatically changes the setting to the 300 dpi resolution, the display temporarily shows “02 PR300” during printing.
• When the printer automatically changes the setting to the simplex printing, the display temporarily shows “02 SX” during printing.
5–11
USER’S GUIDE
When the duplex unit is installed, paper handling and capacity of the
upper paper cassette changes as follows:
For Duplex paper source all sources for duplex printing (DX) available size cut sheet : letter, legal, A4, ISO
B5(except T2) and Executive
The upper paper cassette with duplex installed paper source the upper paper cassette (T1) available size cut sheet : letter, legal, A4,
ISO B5, Executive
A5
ISO B6
A6 envelope : COM 10
Monarch
C5
DL
ISO B5 capacity
:250 sheets/27.5mm
:250 sheets/27.5mm
:200 sheets/24.5mm
:140 sheets/17.5mm
: 80 sheets/10.0mm
: 15 sheets/20.5mm
: 15 sheets/20.5mm
: 15 sheets/20.5mm
: 15 sheets/20.5mm
: 15 sheets/20.5mm
5–12
CHAPTER 6 MAINTENANCE
CHAPTER 6
MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
Toner Cartridge
A new toner cartridge contains enough toner to print approximately 6,000
A4/Letter-size single-sided pages at about 5% coverage (if the print density is set at level 8).
You can check the current page count or the number of printed pages with the MODE switch (PAGE COUNTER). For further information, see
“MODE Switch” in Chapter 4.
✒ Notes
Toner consumption varies according to the image coverage on the page and the print density setting.
•
•
The greater the image coverage, the greater the toner consumption.
If you change the print density setting for lighter or darker printing, toner consumption varies accordingly. To adjust print density setting, see “Checking the Printed Test Pattern or Demo Page” in Chapter 2.
Toner Empty Message
Check printed pages, page counter, and display messages periodically. If the display shows the following message, the printer has almost run out of toner or the toner is not evenly distributed inside the cartridge.
16 TONER EMPTY
Although you can print between 30 and 100 additional pages after the toner empty message first appears, be sure to replace the toner cartridge with a new one before it becomes completely empty.
You can select the printer’s action when the “TONER EMPTY” message appears, whether to stop or continue printing. See
in Chapter 4 .
6–1
USER’S GUIDE
Follow these steps to check the toner cartridge:
1. Remove the toner cartridge from the printer.
If you turn on the printer without a toner cartridge installed, the display shows the following operator call message to prompt you to install the toner cartridge.
14 NO CARTRIDGE
2. Rock the toner cartridge gently several times at a 45° angle to distribute the toner evenly inside the cartridge.
3. Install the toner cartridge again.
4. Try printing and check the printed page.
If you are not satisfied with it or the display still shows the toner empty message, replace the old toner cartridge with a new one.
Replacing the Toner Cartridge
Every time you replace the toner cartridge, you need to clean the inside of the printer. For further information on cleaning, see “Cleaning” in this chapter.
✒ Note
To ensure optimum print quality, be sure to use quality toner cartridges. To obtain toner cartridges, consult the dealer where you purchased the printer.
Before you begin the following steps, refer to
Cartridge” in Chapter 2 . Be sure to review the instructive diagrams.
To replace the toner cartridge, follow these steps:
1. Turn off the printer.
2 Open the top cover of the printer.
3. Lift the top of the toner cartridge slightly and pull it out of the printer.
6–2
CHAPTER 6 MAINTENANCE
4. Clean the anti-static teeth with a clean brush.
✒ Note
Never touch or clean the transfer roller, or print quality may deteriorate.
Clean Brush
Anti-Static Teeth
Fig. 6-1 Cleaning the Anti-Static Teeth
Transfer Roller
5. Clean the transfer guide, referring to
“Cleaning the Printer Interior” in
this chapter .
6. Open the bag to unpack a new toner cartridge.
Handle the toner cartridge with care.
7. Hold the toner cartridge with both hands. Rock it gently several times at a 45° angle. This distributes the toner evenly inside the cartridge.
45°
45°
Fig. 6-2 Rocking the Toner Cartridge
6–3
USER’S GUIDE
8. Bend the tab up and down several times until it is detached from the toner cartridge.
9. Hold the tab firmly and pull it until the sealing tape comes out all the way.
10. Insert the toner cartridge in the direction of the arrows engraved on the cartridge into the side guides until it stops securely in the cartridge holder inside the printer.
✒ Note
Push both sides of the toner cartridge gently until the cartridge is seated correctly in place.
11. Close the top cover of the printer.
6–4
CHAPTER 6 MAINTENANCE
Cleaning
Clean the printer exterior and interior periodically with a dry soft cloth.
When you replace the toner cartridge, be sure to clean the printer interior with a dry soft cloth. If the printed page gets stained with toner, clean the printer interior with a dry soft cloth.
Cleaning the Printer Exterior
Clean the printer exterior as follows:
1. Turn off the printer and unplug the power cord.
2. Remove the paper cassette and optional font cartridge/card.
3. Open the multi-purpose tray.
4. Wipe the printer body with a soft cloth to remove dust from it.
Dip the cloth in water and wring it out thoroughly for cleaning.
✒ Note
Use water or neutral detergents for cleaning. Cleaning with volatile liquids such as thinner or benzine damages the surface of the printer.
Do not use cleaning materials that contain ammonia. It might damage the printer, particularly the toner cartridge.
Fig. 6-3 Cleaning the Printer Exterior
6–5
USER’S GUIDE
5. If paper or foreign objects are stuck in the paper cassettes, remove them.
6–6
Fig. 6-4 Cleaning the Paper Cassette
6. Replace the paper cassette and the optional font cartridge/card.
Cleaning the Printer Interior
Dip a soft cloth in water and wring it out thoroughly for cleaning the printer interior.
✒ Notes
When you clean the printer interior, pay attention to the following:
• If your clothes are smeared with toner, wipe off toner with a dry cloth and wash clothes in cold water. If you wash them in hot water, toner gets
•
• dissolved inside the material and it will not come out.
Never touch the hot fuser.
Never touch or clean the transfer roller, or print quality may be
• adversely affected.
Be careful not to inhale the toner.
Fuser
Transfer Roller
Fig. 6-5 Fuser and Transfer Roller
CHAPTER 6 MAINTENANCE
Clean the printer interior as follows:
1. Turn off the printer and unplug the power cord.
2. Open the top cover of the printer and remove the toner cartridge.
3. Clean both sides of the paper access cover and transfer guide by wiping off toner and paper particles with a dry, soft cloth. The paper access cover can be lifted up to allow easier access for cleaning.
Transfer Guide
Paper Access Cover
Fig. 6-6 Cleaning the Paper Access Cover and Transfer Guide
4. Wipe off toner and paper particles from the top surface of the black plastic paper guide with a dry, soft cloth.
Paper Guide
Fig. 6-7 Cleaning the Paper Guide
5. Detach the cleaning brush from the top cover and clean the anti-static teeth by sliding the brush several times. After cleaning, replace the brush in its slot.
6. Refit the toner cartridge as described in
CARTRIDGE .
7. Close the top cover of the printer and plug in the power cord.
6–7
CHAPTER 7 TROUBLESHOOTING
CHAPTER 7
TROUBLE SHOOTING
TROUBLESHOOTING
If any problems occur, the printer automatically stops printing, diagnoses the problem, and displays the corresponding message to alert you. Take the appropriate action, referring to the following tables. If you cannot clear the problem, consult the dealer where you purchased the printer. Inform the dealer of the message number for quick troubleshooting.
Operator Call Messages
Operator Call Message Meaning Action
CHECK XXXXXXX
Check the paper tray.
XXXXXXX is MP TRAY/
TRAY 1/ TRAY 2.
Check the adjustment lever at the bottom of the upper paper cassette and adjust to the correct setting in case of
CHECK TRAY 1.
Load a stack of paper into the cassette.
Close the cover.
12 COVER OPEN
The upper cover of the printer is open.
13 JAM XXXXXX
Paper is jammed in the printer.
XXXXXX is TRAYS/
INSIDE/ REAR/ DUPLEX.
Remove the jammed paper from the indicated area.
14 NO CARTRIDGE
The toner cartridge is not installed in the printer.
XX NO CASSETTE
The paper cassette is not installed. XX is T1/ T2.
16 TONER EMPTY
The printer has almost run out of toner: you may print another
30 to 100 pages. (The ALARM lamp lights at the same time.)
XX LOAD PAPER
***** SIZE
The wrong size of paper was loaded in the paper cassette
XX. XX is MP/ T1/ T2.(The message appears alternately to show a particular size.)
Install a toner cartridge.
Install the paper cassette.
Remove the toner cartridge, rock it several times at 45°, and install it again. Or replace the toner cartridge with a new one.
Load the requested size of paper in the paper cassette, or load it on the manual feed tray and press the FORM FEED switch.
7–1
USER’S GUIDE
Operator Call Message
18 MANUAL FEED
***** SIZE
19 CHECK FONT
20 FONT REMOVAL
27 NO DX UNIT
27 NO DX TRAY
27 DX OPEN
Meaning
The printer requests you to load paper manually. (The message appears alternately to show a particular size.)
An error occurred in the optional font cartridge/card.
The font cartridge/card was removed while the printer is on-line.
Action
Load the requested size of paper on the multi-purpose tray and press the SEL switch.
Turn off the printer, and reinstall or replace the optional font cartridge/card.
Turn off the printer, install the font cartridge/card, and turn on the printer. The CONTINUE switch will allow you to temporarily ignore this message.
The duplex unit is not installed with the printer when the duplex printing mode is selected.
Install the duplex unit correctly. See the DX-
1200/DX-1600 user’s guide.
The duplex paper guide tray is not installed in T1 when duplex printing mode is selected.
Install the duplex paper guide tray into T1. See the DX-
1200/DX-1600 user’s guide.
The cover of the duplex unit is open.
Close the cover. See the DX-
1200/DX-1600 user’s guide.
7–2
CHAPTER 7 TROUBLESHOOTING
Error Messages
Error Message Meaning Action
31 PRINT OVERRUN
Print overrun Press the CONTINUE switch to start printing the next page.
Data which overran the print area on the page cannot be printed. Check your page protection setting with the
MODE switch. Setting page protection to the correct size could solve this problem. If printing at 600 dpi, you may need to add optional SIMM memory. See page
32 BUFFER ERROR
Input buffer overflow Press the CONTINUE switch to resume printing. Data lost in overflow cannot be printed.
34 MEMORY FULL
Work memory overflow Press the CONTINUE switch to resume printing. If the same error should occur after you press the CONTINUE switch, turn off the printer. Wait a few seconds, then turn it on again.
Reduce the input buffer size.
“KEEP PCL.” Add SIMM memory with power off.
Download font and the fonts saved in the HDD card might cause the error, for it occupies the same work area as the
RAM. Memory expansion is recommended in that case. See page
40 LINE ERROR
Error in the communications circuit
When the serial interface is used, check the communications parameters such as baud rate, code type, parity, and handshake protocols. When the parallel interface is used, check the interface cable connection.
41 PRINT CHECK
Error in communication with the engine controller
Turn off the printer. Wait a few seconds, then turn it on again.
7–3
USER’S GUIDE
Error Message Meaning Action
42 CARD FULL
Card overflow Delete unnecessary macros or fonts, or use a new card. See page
43 CARD W ERROR
Card write error Set the write protect switch of the card to OFF if it has been set to ON. Use a new card. If the same error occurs, consult your dealer or service personnel.
44 SIMM ERROR
Install SIMMs correctly, referring to the printed error
45 MIO ERROR
Error in communication with the MIO card
46 OPT IO ERROR
Connection error with optional feeders and duplex unit.
XX SIZE ERROR
Paper of incorrect size is loaded into XX. XX is T2/ DX.
Install the MIO card correctly.
Check the interface cable connection between the printer and the fitted option.
47 CARD R ERROR
Card read error Use a new card. If the same error occurs, consult your dealer or service personnel.
Set the correct size of paper in
T2 or for duplex printing. See
3 .
IGNORE DATA
(BR-Script 2 mode only)
Incorrect installation of
SIMMs
Data is ignored because of an error in the PostScript
® language program.
Press the RESET switch.
If the same error occurs, you may need to add optional
7–4
CHAPTER 7 TROUBLESHOOTING
Service Call Messages
Service Call Message
50 FUSER MALF
Meaning
Malfunction of fuser
Action
Turn off the printer. Wait 15 minutes, then turn it on again.
51 LASER BD MALF
Malfunction of laser beam detector
52 SCANNER MALF
Malfunction of laser scanner motor
53 DX FAN MALF
Malfunction of fan motor in the duplex unit
54 MOTOR MALF
Malfunction of main motor
Turn off the printer. Wait a few seconds, then turn it on again.
Turn off the printer. Wait a few seconds, then turn it on again.
Turn off the printer. Wait a few seconds, then turn it on again.
Turn off the printer. Wait a few seconds, then turn it on again.
55 HIGH VOL MALF
Malfunction of high voltage power supply
61 PROG ERROR
Turn off the printer. Wait a few seconds, then turn it on again.
Program ROM checksum error Turn off the printer. Wait a few seconds, then turn it on again.
62 FONT ERROR
Font ROM checksum error Turn off the printer. Wait a few seconds, then turn it on again.
63 D-RAM ERROR
D-RAM error Turn off the printer. Wait a few seconds, then turn it on again.
66 NV-W ERROR
NV-RAM error Turn off the printer. Wait a few seconds, then turn it on again.
67 NV-R ERROR
NV-RAM error Turn off the printer. Wait a few seconds, then turn it on again.
68 NV-B ERROR
NV-RAM error Turn off the printer. Wait a few seconds, then turn it on again.
60 SYSTEM ERROR
System error Turn off the printer. Wait a few seconds, then turn it on again.
48 INCORRECT LT
Your lower tray is an LT-1200, and it is not the correct tray for your 16/17 ppm printer.
49 INCORRECT DX
Your duplex unit is a DX-
1200, and it is not correct for your 16/17 ppm printer.
Change LT-1200 to LT-1600
Change DX-1200 to DX-1600
7–5
USER’S GUIDE
Possible Problems
This printer has been designed to be trouble free. However, if any problem should occur, note the display message and take the appropriate action.
This section describes the actions to be taken against paper jams and unsatisfactory printouts.
Paper Jam
If paper jams in the printer, it stops printing and displays the following message.
13 JAM XXXXXX
✒ Notes
If paper jams frequently occur, check the adjustment lever located in the bottom of the paper cassette or clean the printer interior and check the paper quality.
About the Adjustment Lever
If paper is misfeeding or doublefeeding frequently, set the adjustment lever according to the table below.
Recommended Paper Size
I. Backwards : letter, legal, A4, ISO B5, Executive and A5
II. Forwards : ISO B6, A6, COM10, Monarch, C5 and DL
If CHECK TRAY is shown when the paper cassette is filled with paper, check the adjustment lever and adjust to the correct setting.
7–6
Fig. 7-1 Adjustment Lever
Do not use the following paper:
•
•
•
Bent paper
Moist paper
Paper that does not meet specifications
CHAPTER 7 TROUBLESHOOTING
Paper may jam in the paper cassette, inside the printer, at the rear access cover or at the paper exit. Check the jam location and follow the instructions below to remove the jammed paper.
After you have followed the instructions, the printer automatically resumes printing. However, the DATA lamp may come on and the following message may appear on the display.
07 FF PAUSE
After a paper jam has occurred, data usually remains in the printer memory.
The message prompts you to execute a form feed and print out the remaining data. Press the SEL switch to continue.
■ Paper Jam at Paper Exit
13 JAM REAR
If paper has passed behind the rear access cover and a paper jam has occurred at the paper exit, remove the jammed paper by pulling it slowly from the exit as shown below:
Fig. 7-2 Paper Jam at Paper Exit
7–7
USER’S GUIDE
■ Paper Jam at Rear Access Cover
13 JAM REAR
If a paper jam occurs behind the rear access cover before the paper exit, remove the jammed paper as follows:
1. Open the rear access cover.
Rear Access
Cover
2. Pull out the jammed paper slowly in direction A or B.
Direction A
Direction B
Fig. 7-3 Paper Jam at Rear Access Cover
3. Close the rear access cover.
7–8
CHAPTER 7 TROUBLESHOOTING
■ Paper Jam at Fixing Roller inside the printer
13 JAM INSIDE
If a paper jam occurs at the fixing roller, follow these steps to remove the jammed paper:
1. Open the top cover and remove the toner cartridge.
2. Remove the jammed paper by holding it with both hands and pulling it slowly towards you.
Warning
The fixing roller is extremely hot during operation. Remove the paper carefully.
!
Caution
•
After having removed the jammed paper, if the printed paper has a stain, print several pages before restarting your printing.
•
•
Remove the jammed paper carefully so as not to spread toner.
Take care not to stain your hands and clothes with toner. Wash toner stains immediately with cold water.
•
Never touch the transfer roller.
Fig. 7-4 Paper Jam at Fixing Roller
Fixing Roller
3. Install the toner cartridge and close the top cover.
7–9
USER’S GUIDE
■ Paper Jam at the Paper Access Cover Inside the Printer
13 JAM INSIDE
If a paper jam occurs at the paper access cover, follow these steps to remove the jammed paper:
1. Pull the upper paper cassette out of the printer to release the edge of the paper from the paper feed roller, or the paper might be torn and difficult to remove.
2. Open the top cover and remove the toner cartridge.
3. Raise the paper access cover.
4. Remove the jammed paper using the following methods:
If paper has passed through the paper access cover and toner is on the paper, pull it with making paper edge round in direction A (toward the upper side of the printer).
!
Caution
Take care not to stain your hands and clothes with toner. Wash out toner stains immediately with cold water.
Direction A
Paper Access
Cover
Fig. 7-5 Paper Jam at Paper Access Cover
5. Close the paper access cover.
6. Install the toner cartridge and close the top cover.
7–10
CHAPTER 7 TROUBLESHOOTING
■ Paper Jam in the Paper Cassette
13 JAM TRAYS
If a paper jam occurs inside the paper cassette, follow these steps:
1. Pull out the paper cassette.
2. Remove the jammed paper.
Fig. 7-6 Paper Jam at Paper Cassette
3. Install the paper cassette.
!
Caution
Do not pull out the upper paper cassette while paper is being fed from the lower paper cassette, or it causes a paper jam.
■ Paper Jam in the Multi-purpose Tray
13 JAM TRAYS
If a paper jam occurs in the multi-purpose tray, follow these steps:
1. Remove the jammed paper in the multi-purpose tray.
2. Reset all the paper on the multi-purpose tray correctly.
3. Open and close the top cover.
7–11
USER’S GUIDE
Unsatisfactory Printouts
If you are not satisfied with the printout quality, check the problem and take the necessary action to clear it.
✒ Note
It is possible that paper could meet all of the guidelines listed in the specifications and still not print satisfactorily. This may be due to temperature, humidity or other variables over which the printer has no control. If you cannot clear print problems, consult the dealer where you purchased the printer.
■ Unclear Printouts
The printed page may have white stripes or faint images.
Here come Flat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come together right now, over me. Here come Flat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come together right now, over me. Here come Flat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come together rightA now, over me. Here come Flat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come togetherA right now, over me. Here come Flat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come AAA together right now, over me. Here come Flat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. A
Come together right now, over me. Here come Flat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to beA free. Come together right now, over me. Here come Flat-top ,he come. Lucy in the sky with Diamonde. AA
One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come together right now, over me. Here come Flat-top ,heAA come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come together right now, over me. Here come Flat-top
,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come together right now, over me. Here come Flattop ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come together right now, over me. Lucy in the sky with Diamonde. Here come Flat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come AAA together right now, over me. Here come Flat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. A
Come together right now, over me. Here come Flat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come together right now, over me. Here come Flat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you goA to be free. Come together right now, over me. Here come Flat-top ,he come. Lucy in the sky with AAAAA
Diamonde. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come together right now, over me. Here come A
Flat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come together right now, over me. HereA come Flat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come together right now, over me. A
Here come Flat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come together right now, over me. Here come Flat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come together right now, over me. Here come Flat-top ,he come. Lucy in the sky with Diamonde. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come together right now, over me. Here come Flat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come together right now, over me. Here come Flat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come together right now, over me. Here come Flat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell A you is you go to be free. Come together right now, over me. Here come Flat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come together right now, over me. Here come Flat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come together right now, over me. Here come Flat-top ,he come. One A thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come together right now, over me. Here come Flat-top ,he come.
One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come together right now, over me. Here come Flat-top ,he A come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come together right now, over me. Here come Flat-top
,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come together right now, over me. Here come Flattop ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come together right now, over me. Here come
Flat-top ,he come. Lucy in the sky with Diamonde. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come AAA
Fig. 7-7 White Stripes or Faint Images
If you see these print problems, check for the toner empty message. The toner may not be distributed evenly in the cartridge or the toner cartridge may be empty.
16 TONER EMPTY
7–12
Follow these steps to clear the problem:
1. Open the top cover of the printer.
CHAPTER 7 TROUBLESHOOTING
Fig. 7-8 Opening the Top Cover
2. Remove the toner cartridge from the printer.
Fig. 7-9 Removing the Toner Cartridge
7–13
USER’S GUIDE
3. Rock the cartridge gently several times at a 45° angle.
This distributes the toner evenly inside the cartridge.
Fig. 7-10 Distributing the Toner Evenly
4. Install the toner cartridge and close the top cover of the printer.
5. Print out several pages.
If you are still not satisfied with the printout, replace the toner cartridge with a new one.
45°
45°
7–14
CHAPTER 7 TROUBLESHOOTING
■ Stains and Stripes
If the printed page is stained with toner or has vertical stripes, clean the printer interior. See “Cleaning” in Chapter 6.
Here come Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come together right now, over me. Here come Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come together right now, over me. Here come Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come together rightA now, over me. Here come Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come togetherA right now, over me. Here come Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come AAA together right now, over me. Here come Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. A
Come together right now, over me. Here come Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to beA free. Come together right now, over me. Here come Pat-top ,he come. Diamonde the skyLucky in with .
AA One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come in the sky right now, over me. Here come Pat-top
,heAA come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come together right now, over me. Here come
Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come in the sky right now, over me. Here come Flat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come tin the sky right now, over me. in the sky Lucy Diamonde with . Here come Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free.
Come AAA together right now, over me. Here come Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. A Come together right now, over me. Here come Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. together Comeright now, over me. Here come Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you goA to be free. Come together right now, over me. Here come Pat-top ,he come. Lucky in the sky with
AAAAA Diamonde. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come tin the sky right now, over me. Here come A Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come in the sky right now, over me. HereA come Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come tin the sky right now, over me. A Here come Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come together right now, over me. Here come Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come together right now, over me. Here come v ,he come. Lucky Diamonde in the sky with . One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come tin the skyright now, over me. Here come Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come in the sky right now, over me. Here come Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come in the sky right now, over me. Here come Pat-top ,he come.
One thing I can tell A you is you go to be free. Come in the sky right now, over me. Here come Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come in the sky right now, over me. Here come Pattop ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come in the sky right now, over me. Here come
Pat-top ,he come. One A thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come in the sky right now, over me. Here come Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come in the sky right now, over me.
Here come Pat-top ,he A come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come in the sky right now, over me. Here come Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come together right now, over me. Here come Flat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come tin the sky right now, over me. Here come Pat-top ,he come. Lucy in the sky with Amesist. One thing I can tell you is
Here come Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come together right now, over me. Here come Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come together right now, over me. Here come Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come together rightA now, over me. Here come Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come togetherA right now, over me. Here come Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come AAA together right now, over me. Here come Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. A
Come together right now, over me. Here come Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to beA free. Come together right now, over me. Here come Pat-top ,he come. Diamonde the skyLucky in with .
AA One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come in the sky right now, over me. Here come Pat-top
,heAA come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come together right now, over me. Here come
Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come in the sky right now, over me. Here come Flat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come tin the sky right now, over me. in the sky Lucy Diamonde with . Here come Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free.
Come AAA together right now, over me. Here come Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. A Come together right now, over me. Here come Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. together Comeright now, over me. Here come Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you goA to be free. Come together right now, over me. Here come Pat-top ,he come. Lucky in the sky with
AAAAA Diamonde. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come tin the sky right now, over me. Here come A Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come in the sky right now, over me. HereA come Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come tin the sky right now, over me. A Here come Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come together right now, over me. Here come Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come together right now, over me. Here come v ,he come. Lucky Diamonde in the sky with . One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come tin the skyright now, over me. Here come Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come in the sky right now, over me. Here come Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come in the sky right now, over me. Here come Pat-top ,he come.
One thing I can tell A you is you go to be free. Come in the sky right now, over me. Here come Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come in the sky right now, over me. Here come Pattop ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come in the sky right now, over me. Here come
Pat-top ,he come. One A thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come in the sky right now, over me. Here come Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come in the sky right now, over me.
Here come Pat-top ,he A come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come in the sky right now, over me. Here come Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come together right now, over me. Here come Flat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come tin the sky right now, over me. Here come Pat-top ,he come. Lucy in the sky with Amesist. One thing I can tell you is
Here come Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come together right now, over me. Here come Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come together right now, over me. Here come Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come together rightA now, over me. Here come Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come togetherA right now, over me. Here come Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come AAA together right now, over me. Here come Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. A
Come together right now, over me. Here come Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to beA free. Come together right now, over me. Here come Pat-top ,he come. Diamonde the skyLucky in with .
AA One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come in the sky right now, over me. Here come Pat-top
,heAA come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come together right now, over me. Here come
Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come in the sky right now, over me. Here come Flat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come tin the sky right now, over me. in the sky Lucy Diamonde with . Here come Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free.
Come AAA together right now, over me. Here come Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. A Come together right now, over me. Here come Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. together Comeright now, over me. Here come Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you goA to be free. Come together right now, over me. Here come Pat-top ,he come. Lucky in the sky with
AAAAA Diamonde. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come tin the sky right now, over me. Here come A Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come in the sky right now, over me. HereA come Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come tin the sky right now, over me. A Here come Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come together right now, over me. Here come Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come together right now, over me. Here come v ,he come. Lucky Diamonde in the sky with . One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come tin the skyright now, over me. Here come Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come in the sky right now, over me. Here come Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come in the sky right now, over me. Here come Pat-top ,he come.
One thing I can tell A you is you go to be free. Come in the sky right now, over me. Here come Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come in the sky right now, over me. Here come Pattop ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come in the sky right now, over me. Here come
Pat-top ,he come. One A thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come in the sky right now, over me. Here come Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come in the sky right now, over me.
Here come Pat-top ,he A come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come in the sky right now, over me. Here come Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come together right now, over me. Here come Flat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come tin the sky right now, over me. Here come Pat-top ,he come. Lucy in the sky with Amesist. One thing I can tell you is
Stains Stripes Stains at Fixed Intervals
Fig. 7-11 Dark Stripes or Toner Stains
If the same print problem occurs after cleaning, take any of the following actions:
• Make sure that you use paper or OHP films that meet specifications and have the correct printing surface.
• Check that the toner cartridge is not damaged. If it is damaged, replace it with a new one.
If the stripes or stains are vertically repetitive on a page, take the following action in accordance with the intervals of the stripes or stains.
Interval Action
95 mm or 3.7” Replace the toner cartridge.
53 mm or 2.1” Print several pages. *
51 mm or 2.0” Replace the toner cartridge.
38 mm or 1.5” Replace the toner cartridge.
* If the problem occurs repeatedly, the transfer roller needs to be
replaced with a new one. Consult your dealer or sales personnel.
7–15
USER’S GUIDE
■ White Spots
The printed page may have white spots in black text and graphics areas.
Make sure that you use paper or OHP films that meet specifications and have the correct printing surface.
Fig. 7-12 White Spots
■ Toner Scatter
If toner scatters around printed characters and stains the printed page, clean the printer interior. See “Cleaning” in Chapter 6.
7–16
Fig. 7-13 Toner Scatter
If the same print problem occurs after cleaning, take any of the following actions:
• Make sure that you use paper, OHP films, or envelopes that meet specifications.
• Check for glue on the paper. Glue causes toner to scatter.
• If toner scatters over the entire printing surface, adjust the print density. See “Checking the Printed Test Pattern or Font List” in
Chapter 2.
CHAPTER 7 TROUBLESHOOTING
■ Black Page
If an entire page is printed in black, make sure that the toner cartridge is properly installed. Never use heat-sensitive paper, or it may cause this problem.
Fig. 7-14 Black Page
■ White Page
If nothing is printed on pages, make sure that the toner cartridge is not empty, the sealing tape is removed from the toner cartridge, or you use paper, OHP films, or envelopes that meet specifications.
If a stack of paper is not fanned, more than one sheet may be loaded at a time, which may cause blank pages to be ejected.
Fig. 7-15 White Page
7–17
USER’S GUIDE
■ Dropout
If nothing or part of a page is printed, make sure that the toner cartridge is not empty or the toner is evenly distributed in the cartridge. Take the proper action, referring to “Unclear Printouts” in this section.
Also, make sure that you use paper, OHP films or envelopes that meet specifications. Moist paper causes this problem.
If the print density is set too low, this problem may occur. Adjust the print density to the proper setting. See “Checking the Printed Test Pattern or Font
List” in Chapter 2.
Here come Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come together right now, over me. Here come Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come together right now, over me. Here come Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come together rightA now, over me. Here come Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come togetherA right now, over me. Here come Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come AAA together right now, over me. Here come Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. A
Come together right now, over me. Here come Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to beA free. Come together right now, over me. Here come Pat-top ,he come. Diamonde the skyLucky in with .
AA One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come in the sky right now, over me. Here come Pat-top
,heAA come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come together right now, over me. Here come
Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come in the sky right now, over me. Here come Flat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come tin the sky right now, over me. in the sky Lucy Diamonde with . Here come Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free.
Come AAA together right now, over me. Here come Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. A Come together right now, over me. Here come Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. together Comeright now, over me. Here come Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you goA to be free. Come together right now, over me. Here come Pat-top ,he come. Lucky in the sky with
AAAAA Diamonde. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come tin the sky right now, over me. Here come A Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come in the sky right now, over me. HereA come Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come tin the sky right now, over me. A Here come Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come together right now, over me. Here come Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come together right now, over me. Here come v ,he come. Lucky Diamonde in the sky with . One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come tin the skyright now, over me. Here come Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come in the sky right now, over me. Here come Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come in the sky right now, over me. Here come Pat-top ,he come.
One thing I can tell A you is you go to be free. Come in the sky right now, over me. Here come Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come in the sky right now, over me. Here come Pattop ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come in the sky right now, over me. Here come
Pat-top ,he come. One A thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come in the sky right now, over me. Here come Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come in the sky right now, over me.
Here come Pat-top ,he A come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come in the sky right now, over me. Here come Pat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come together right now, over me. Here come Flat-top ,he come. One thing I can tell you is you go to be free. Come tin the sky right now, over me. Here come Pat-top ,he come. Lucy in the sky with Amesist. One thing I can tell you is
Fig. 7-16 Dropout
■ Poor Halftone or Grayscale Transitions
If images do not have smooth transitions as gray shades gradually change, turn off the high resolution control (HRC SETTING) in “RESOLUTION
MODE” with the MODE switch.
HRC = OFF HRC = MEDIUM
Fig. 7-17 Adjustment of High Resolution Control
7–18
CHAPTER 7 TROUBLESHOOTING
!
Caution
Operation of the printer outside the specifications shall be deemed abuse and all repairs thereafter shall be the sole liability of the end user/purchaser.
(For USA & CANADA Only)
For technical and operational assistance, please call:
In USA
In CANADA
1-800-276-7746 (outside California)
714-859-9700 Ext. 329 (within California)
1-800-853-6660
514-685-6464 (within Montreal)
If you have comments or suggestions, please write us at:
In USA
In CANADA
Printer Customer Support
Brother International Corporation
15 Musick
Irvine, CA 92718
Brother International Corporation (Canada), Ltd.
- Marketing Dept.
1, rue Hôtel de Ville
Dollard-des-Ormeaux, PQ, Canada H9B 3H6
BBS
For downloading drivers from our Bulletin Board Service, call:
In USA 1-714-859-2610
In CANADA 1-514-685-2040
Please log on to our BBS with your first name, last name and a four digit number for your password. Our BBS supports modem speeds up to 14,400, 8 bits no parity, 1 stop bit.
Fax-Back System (For USA only)
Brother Customer Service has installed an easy to use Fax-Back System so you can get instant answers to common technical questions and product information for all
Brother products. This is available 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. You can use the system to send the information to any fax machine, not just the one you are calling from.
Please call 1-800-521-2846 and follow the voice prompts to receive faxed instructions on how to use the system and your index of Fax-Back subjects.
DEALERS/SERVICE CENTERS (USA only)
For the name of an authorized dealer or service center, call 1-800-284-4357.
SERVICE CENTERS (Canada only)
For service center addresses in Canada, call 1-800-853-6660
INTERNET ADDRESS
For technical questions and downloading drivers: http://www.brother.com
7–19
APPENDICES
APPENDICES
PRINTER SPECIFICATIONS
Printing
Print Method
Laser
Resolution
Print Speed
Warm Up
First Print
Print Media
Resident Printer Fonts
Electrophotography by semiconductor laser beam scanning
Wavelength: 780 nm
Pulse duration: 80 ns
Output: 5 mW max.
600 dots per inch (The resolution can be enhanced by using high resolution control feature.)
HL-1260e: 12 pages per minute (A4/Letter size)
HL-1660: 16 pages per minute (A4 size)
17 pages per minute (Letter size)
Max. 1 minute at 20°C (68°F)
HL-1260e: 20 seconds or less
HL-1660: 16 seconds or less
(A4 size by face down print delivery from cassette feed)
Prestart by software command for 10 second first print
Toner in a single-component cartridge
Life Expectancy: 6,000 single-sided pages/cartridge
(A4 or letter size paper with the print density set at level 8 with about 5% coverage).
• HP LaserJet 4+, EPSON FX-850, and
IBM Proprinter XL modes
66 scalable fonts and 12 bitmapped fonts
• BR-Script Level 2 mode
66 scalable fonts
For further information about resident fonts, see
“RESIDENT FONTS” in Appendix.
Appendix–1
USER’S GUIDE
Functions
CPU
Emulation
Interface
RAM
Font Cartridge/Card Slots
Control Panel
Diagnostics
79R3041 20 MHz (MIPS R3000 architecture)
Automatic emulation selection
• HP LaserJet 4+ (PCL 5e)
• BR-Script Level 2
• HP-GL
• EPSON FX-850
• IBM Proprinter XL
Automatic interface selection among bi-directional parallel, RS-232C serial, and MIO interface.
For further information, see the section “INTERFACE
SPECIFICATIONS” in Appendix.
2 Mbyte or 4 Mbyte
(expandable to 66 Mbytes with SIMMs)
The standard memory fitted can vary depending on the printer model and country.
2 slots
1 font cartridge slot: HP LaserJet Compatible
1 card slot: PCMCIA Type III Compatible
8 switches, 4 lamps, and 16-column liquid crystal display
Self-diagnostic program
Appendix–2
APPENDICES
Electrical and Mechanical
Power Source U.S.A. and Canada: AC 110 to 120 V, 60 Hz
Europe and Australia: AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz
Power Consumption
Noise
<HL-1260e> Printing: 290 W or less
Stand-by: 75 W or less
Stand-by in sleep mode: 16 W or less
<HL-1660> Printing:
Stand-by:
340 W or less
75 W or less
Stand-by in sleep mode: 16 W or less
<HL-1260e> Printing:
Stand-by:
<HL-1660> Printing:
Stand-by:
49 dB A or less
40 dB A or less
52 dB A or less
45 dB A or less
Temperature
Humidity
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Weight
Operating: 10 to 32.5°C (50°F to 90.5°F)
Storage: 0 to 35°C (38°F to 95°F)
Operating: 20 to 80% (without condensation)
Storage: 10 to 80% (without condensation)
371.6 x 326.5 x 393 mm (14.8 x 12.9 x 15.5 inches)
371.6 x 446.5 x 393 mm (14.8 x 17.6 x 15.5 inches) with an optional lower tray unit fitted
Approx. 15 kg (33 lbs.)
Approx. 21.0 kg (46.3 lbs.) with optional lower tray unit and toner cartridge fitted .
Appendix–3
USER’S GUIDE
PAPER SPECIFICATIONS
Paper Input
Printed Output
Paper Type
Cassettes :
• Standard upper cassette (Tray 1)
• Optional lower cassette (Tray 2)
• Paper size:
TRAY 1: Letter, legal, A4, ISO B5, Executive,
A5, ISO B6, A6, COM10, Monarch,
C5 and DL
TRAY 2: Letter, legal, A4 and Executive
(OPTION)
• Max. stacking height in the cassette = 55 mm(2.1”)
• Max. paper cassette capacity = Approx. 500 sheets of 80 g/m 2 (20 lbs) when duplex unit installed = Approx. 250 sheets of
80 g/m 2 (20 lbs) A4/letter (Tray 1)
Multi-purpose tray :
Multi-purpose tray capacity = Approx. 150 sheets of
80 g/m 2 (20 lbs)
Face down print delivery: Approx. 250 sheets
Face up output delivery
Cassette Feed:
Standard upper cassette (Tray 1) :
• Plain paper of letter, legal, A4, ISO B5, A5,
ISO B6, A6 and Executive sizes
[60 to 105 g/m 2 (16 to 28 lbs)]
• Envelopes of COM10, Monarch, C5, DL and ISO
B5 sizes
Multi-purpose tray (MP tray) :
• Plain paper from 90 x 148 mm to 216 x 356 mm
(from 3.5” x 5.8” to 8.5” x 14”)
[60 to 135 g/m 2 (16 to 36 lbs)]
• Overhead projector (OHP) films
• Colored paper
• Postcards
• Label stock
• Envelopes of COM10, Monarch, C5, DL and ISO
B5 sizes
Optional lower cassette (Tray 2) :
Plain paper of letter, legal, A4 and Executive sizes
[60 to 90 g/m 2 (16 to 24 lbs)]
Appendix–4
APPENDICES
Test printing on paper, especially envelopes, is recommended before making a large purchase. The following types of envelopes are not recommended for use.
• Envelopes with thick and/or crooked edges
• Damaged, curled, wrinkled, or irregularly shaped envelopes
• Extremely shiny or highly textured envelopes
• Envelopes with clasps
• Envelopes of baggy construction
• Envelopes not sharply creased
• Embossed envelopes
• Envelopes already printed with a laser printer
• Envelopes pre-printed on the inside
• Envelopes that cannot be arranged uniformly when placed in a pile
✒ Notes
•
An area 15 mm (0.6”) from the edges of the envelope will not be printed.
• Avoid feeding labels with the carrier sheet exposed. Otherwise, your printer will be damaged.
• When feeding OHP film, the use of a recommended type for laser printers will ensure optimum printing. For detailed information on the specification or purchase, please contact your nearest authorized sales representative or the place of purchase.
The printer is designed to work well with most types of xerographic and bond paper. However, some paper variables may have an effect on print quality or handling reliability. Always test samples of paper before buying to ensure that it provides desirable performance. Some important guidelines when selecting paper are:
1. Supplier should be informed that the paper or envelopes will be used in a laser printer.
2. Preprinted papers must use inks that can withstand the temperature of the printers fusing process. (200 degrees centigrade)
3. If selecting a cotton bond paper, paper having a rough surface such as cockle or laid finished paper, or paper that is wrinkled or puckered may exhibit degraded performance.
Appendix–5
USER’S GUIDE
✒ Note
The manufacturer neither warrants or recommends the use of any particular paper. The operator is responsible for the quality of paper used with the printer.
Paper Types to Avoid
Some types of paper might not perform well or may cause damage to your printer.
Types of paper to avoid are:
1. Highly textured paper.
2. Smooth or shiny paper.
3. Paper that is coated or has a chemical finish.
4. Damaged, wrinkled or prefolded paper.
5. Paper exceeding the recommend weight specification specified in the manual.
6. Paper with tabs and staples.
7. Letterheads using low temperature dyes or thermography.
8. Multipart or carbonless paper.
DAMAGE OR OTHER DEFECTS CAUSED BY THE USE OF
PAPERS LISTED UNDER “PAPER TYPES TO AVOID” WILL NOT
BE COVERED UNDER ANY WARRANTY OR SERVICE
AGREEMENTS.
Most envelopes will perform acceptably on your printer. However; some envelopes will have feeding and print quality problems because of their construction. A suitable envelope should have edges with a straight, well creased folds and should not have more than two thickness of paper along the lead edge. The envelope should lie flat and not have baggy or flimsy construction. Purchase quality envelopes only from a supplier who understands that the envelopes will be used in a laser printer. All envelopes should be tested prior to use to ensure desirable print results.
Envelope Types to Avoid
1. Envelopes constructed with a paper with a weight that exceeds the paper weight specifications for the printer.
2. Poorly manufactured envelopes with edges that are not straight or consistently square.
3. Envelopes with “baggy” construction or folds that are not sharply creased.
4. Envelopes with transparent windows, holes, cutouts or perforations.
Appendix–6
APPENDICES
5. Envelopes with clasps, snaps or tie strings.
6. Envelopes made with smooth or shiny paper.
7. Envelopes that are rough, highly textured, or deeply embossed.
8. Envelopes which do not lie flat or that are curled, wrinkled, or irregularly shaped.
9. Envelopes having an open flap with an adhesive that seals the envelope.
USE OF ANY OF THE ENVELOPES LISTED ABOVE MAY
CAUSE DAMAGE TO YOUR PRINTER. SUCH DAMAGE IS NOT
COVERED UNDER ANY WARRANTY OR SERVICE
AGREEMENT.
✒ Note
The manufacturer neither warrants nor recommends the use of a particular envelope because envelope properties are subject to change by the envelope manufacturer. The entire responsibility for the quality and performance of the envelope lies with the customer.
The printer will print on most type of labels and transparencies designed for use with a laser printer. Labels should have an adhesive that is acrylic-based since such material is more stable at the high temperatures in the fusing unit. Adhesives should not come in contact with any part of the printer, because the label stock may stick to the drum or rollers and cause jams and print quality problems. No adhesive should be exposed between the labels.
Labels should be arranged so that they cover the entire page with the only exposed spaces being lengthwise down the sheet. Using labels with spaces may result in labels peeling off and causing serious jam or print problems.
All labels and transparencies used in this printer must be able to withstand a temperature of 200 degrees centigrade (392 degrees Fahrenheit) for a period of 0.1 seconds.
Label and transparency sheets should not exceed the paper weight specifications described in the User’s Guide. Labels and transparencies exceeding this specification may not feed or print properly and cause damage to your printer.
The entire responsibility for the quality and performance of labels and transparencies lies with the customer.
DAMAGE CAUSED BY THE USE OF UNSATISFACTORY
LABELS OR TRANSPARENCIES IS NOT COVERED UNDER
ANY WARRANTY OR SERVICE AGREEMENTS.
Appendix–7
USER’S GUIDE
INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS
Bi-directional Parallel Interface
Interface Connector
A shielded cable that is IEEE 1285 compliant with the following pin assignment should be used. Most existing parallel cables support bidirectional communication, but some might have incompatible pin assignments or may not be IEEE 1284 compliant.
18 15 12 9 6 3 1
36 33 30 27 24 21 19
Fig. A-1 Parallel Interface Connector
Pin Assignment
13
14
15
16
17
18
Pin No.
1
5
6
7
8
9
2
3
4
10
11
12
Signal
DATA STROBE
DATA 0
DATA 1
DATA 2
DATA 3
DATA 4
DATA 5
DATA 6
DATA 7
ACKNLG
BUSY
PE
SLCT
Pin No.
19
23
24
25
20
21
22
26
27
28
29
30
31
AUTO FEED 32
N.C. 33
0V 34
0V 35
+5V 36
Signal
Twisted pair ground
Twisted pair ground
Twisted pair ground
Twisted pair ground
Twisted pair ground
Twisted pair ground
Twisted pair ground
Twisted pair ground
Twisted pair ground
Twisted pair ground
Twisted pair ground
INPUT PRIME RET
INPUT PRIME
FAULT
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
Appendix–8
APPENDICES
Pin No.
Signal Name
1 DATA STROBE
2 - 9
10
11
12
13
14
31
32
36
Signal Description
DATA 0 - 7
ACKNLG
BUSY
PE
SLCT
AUTO FEED
INPUT PRIME
FAULT
SLCT IN
IN/OUT
IN
IN
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
IN
Explanation
Data is latched at the leading edge of this signal.
Parallel 8 bit data
Data reception is completed and the printer is ready for the next data reception when this signal becomes low.
The printer cannot receive data when this signal is high. The signal becomes high under data receiving, off-line, or error states.
This signal becomes high when a paper empty state is detected.
This signal becomes high when the printer is selected and low when it is deselected.
This signal is used only for the bi-directional interface.
This signal is used only for the bi-directional interface.
This signal becomes low when the printer is in the paper empty, off-line, or error states.
This signal is used only for the bi-directional interface.
Appendix–9
USER’S GUIDE
Parallel Cable Connection for IBM-PC/AT or Compatible
Computers and IBM-PS/2 Computers
Signal
DATA STROBE
DATA 0
DATA 1
DATA 2
DATA 3
DATA 4
DATA 5
DATA 6
DATA 7
ACKNLG
BUSY
PE
SLCT
AUTO FEED
GND
FAULT
SLCT IN
11
12
13
14
7
8
9
10
5
6
3
4
Printer Pin No.
Computer Pin No.
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
19 - 30
32
36
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
18 - 25
15
17
Appendix–10
APPENDICES
RS-232C Serial Interface
Standard Specifications
1) Baud rate: 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600,
19200, 38400, 57600 or 115200 baud
2) Synchronization: Start-stop
3) Communications control: No protocol
4) Data length: Serial 7 bits or 8 bits
5) Parity:
6) Stop bit:
7) Protocol:
Odd, even, or none
1 or 2 stop bits
Xon/Xoff or DTR
Interface Connectors
A shielded cable should be used.
13 10 7 4 1
25 21 18
Fig. A-2 Serial Interface Connector
14
Pin Assignment
Pin
No.
5
6
7
3
4
1
2
8
9
10
11
12
13
Signal IN/OUT
Printer Controller
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
FG
SD
RD
RS
NC
DR
SG
Pin
No.
18
19
20
14
15
16
17
21
22
23
24
25
Signal IN/OUT
Printer Controller
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
ER
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
Appendix–11
USER’S GUIDE
Signal Description
Signal Name IN/OUT Explanation
FG – Frame Ground
SD
RD
OUT Send Data.
IN Receive Data. Receives data transmitted from the computer.
RS
DR
SG
ER
OUT Request To Send. “SPACE” level when the printer is ready to send data to the computer.
IN Data Set Ready. When DSR is at “SPACE” level, data can be accepted.
– Signal Ground
OUT Data Terminal Ready. “MARK” level when the printer is Busy.
Appendix–12
APPENDICES
Serial Cable Connection for IBM-PC/AT or Compatible
Computers and IBM-PS/2 Computers
The following diagrams show the pin connections for the most common serial communications.
■ DB-9 Serial Connection
When you use a computer with a 9-pin serial port, use a cable with the following pin configurations.
Printer (Male)
SD 2
RD 3
DR (DSR) 6
SG 7
ER (DTR) 20
Computer (Female)
2 RD
3 SD
6
8
4 ER (DTR)
5 SG
DR (DSR)
CS (CTS)
■ DB-25 Serial Connection
When you use a computer with a 25-pin serial port, use a cable with the following pin configurations.
Printer (Male)
FG 1
SD
RD
DR (DSR) 6
2
3
SG 7
ER (DTR) 20
Computer (Female)
1 FG
3 RD
2 SD
20 ER (DTR)
7 SG
5 CS (CTS)
6 DR (DSR)
✒ Note
Any pins not shown in the figures above are not connected.
Appendix–13
USER’S GUIDE
SYMBOL/CHARACTER SETS
You can select the symbol and character sets with the FONT switch in the
HP LaserJet 4+, EPSON FX-850, and IBM Proprinter XL emulation modes. See “FONT Switch” in Chapter 4.
When you have selected the HP-GL emulation mode, you can select the standard or alternate character set with the MODE switch. See
“GRAPHICS MODE” in Chapter 4.
OCR Symbol Sets
When the OCR-A or OCR-B font is selected, the corresponding symbol set is always used.
OCR-A
OCR-B
Appendix–14
HP LaserJet 4+ Mode
Roman 8 (8U)
ISO Latin1 (0N)
ISO Latin2 (2N)
ISO Latin5 (5N)
APPENDICES
Appendix–15
USER’S GUIDE
PC-8 (10U)
PC-8 D/N (11U)
PC-850 (12U)
PC-852 (17U)
Appendix–16
PC-8 Turkish (9T)
Windows Latin1 (19U)
Windows Latin2 (9E)
Windows Latin5 (5T)
APPENDICES
Appendix–17
USER’S GUIDE
Legal (1U)
Ventura Math (6M)
Ventura Intl (13J)
Ventura US (14J)
Appendix–18
PS Math (5M)
PS Text (10J)
Math-8 (8M)
Pi Font (15U)
APPENDICES
Appendix–19
USER’S GUIDE
MS Publishing (6J)
Windows 3.0 (9U)
Desktop (7J)
MC Text (12J)
Appendix–20
APPENDICES
Symbol (19M)
Windings (579L)
SYMBOL SET
ISO 2 IRV
ISO 4 UK
ISO 6 ASCII
ISO10 SWE/FIN
ISO11 Swedish
ISO14 JISASCII
ISO15 Italian
ISO16 POR
ISO17 Spanish
ISO21 German
ISO25 French
ISO57 Chinese
ISO60 NOR v1
ISO61 NOR v2
ISO69 French
ISO84 POR
ISO85 Spanish
HP German
HP Spanish
The following table shows characters available only in the corresponding character set. The numbers at the top of the table are hexadecimal code values with which characters are to be replaced in the Roman 8 character set. For other characters, see the Roman 8 character set.
23 24 40 5B 5C 5D 5E 60 7B 7C 7D 7E
Appendix–21
USER’S GUIDE
EPSON Mode
US ASCII
The following table shows characters available only in the corresponding character set. The numbers at the top of the table are hexadecimal code values with which characters are to be replaced in the US ASCII character set. For other characters, see the US ASCII character set.
CHARACTER SET
German
UK ASCII I
French I
Danish I
Italy
Spanish
Swedish
Japanese
Norwegian
Danish II
UK ASCII II
French II
Dutch
South African
23 24 40 5B 5C 5D 5E 60 7B 7C 7D 7E
Appendix–22
PC-8
PC-8 D/N
PC-850
PC-852
APPENDICES
Appendix–23
USER’S GUIDE
PC-860
PC-863
PC-865
PC-8 Turkish
Appendix–24
IBM Mode
PC-8
PC-8 D/N
PC-850
PC-852
APPENDICES
Appendix–25
USER’S GUIDE
PC-860
PC-863
PC-865
PC-8 Turkish
Appendix–26
HP-GL Mode
ANSI ASCII
9825 CHR. SET
APPENDICES
Appendix–27
USER’S GUIDE
FRENCH/GERMAN
SCANDINAVIAN
SPANISH/LATIN
JIS ASCII
Appendix–28
ROMAN8 EXT.
ISO IRV
ISO SWEDISH
ISO SWEDISH:N
APPENDICES
Appendix–29
USER’S GUIDE
ISO NORWAY 1
ISO GERMAN
ISO FRENCH
ISO U.K.
Appendix–30
ISO ITALIAN
ISO SPANISH
ISO PORTUGUESE
ISO NORWAY 2
APPENDICES
Appendix–31
USER’S GUIDE
Symbol Sets Supported by the Printer’s Intellifont Compatible
Typefaces
PCL Symbol Set
1 4 J
6 J
8 M
5 M
6 M
1 5 U
1 7 U
9 T
1 9 U
9 E
5 T
7 J
1 0 J
1 3 J
Set ID Symbol Set
8 U Roman-8
0 N
2 N
ISO 8859-1 Latin1
ISO 8859-2 Latin2
5 N
1 0 U
1 1 U
1 2 U
ISO 8859-9 Latin5
PC-8
PC-8 D/N
PC-850
PC-852
PC-Turk
Windows 3.1 Latin1
Windows 3.1 Latin2
Windows 3.1 Latin5
DeskTop
PS Text
Ventura International
Ventura US
Microsoft Publishing
Math-8
PS Math
Ventura Math
PI Font
0 G
1 G
0 D
1 D
3 S
4 S
5 S
6 S
0 S
0 I
1 S
2 S
1 U
1 E
0 U
2 U
Legal
ISO 4: United Kingdom*
ISO 6: ASCII*
ISO 2: IRV*
ISO 11: Swedish: names*
ISO 15: Italian*
HP Spanish*
ISO 17: Spanish*
ISO 10: Swedish*
ISO 16: Portuguese*
ISO 84: Portuguese*
ISO 85: Spanish*
HP German*
ISO 21: German*
ISO 60: Norwegian 1*
ISO 61: Norwegian 2*
0 F
1 F
0 K
2 K
ISO 25: French*
ISO 69: French*
ISO 14: JIS ASCII*
ISO 57: Chinese*
9 U
1 2 J
Windows 3.0 Latin1
MC Text
1 9 M Symbol
5 7 9 L Wingdings
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Typeface
Alaska Antique Brougham Cleveland Connect- Guatemala Letter
Oakland Cond.
icut Antique Gothic
• • • • • • •
•
• •
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
*These symbol sets are variations of the Roman-8 symbol set.
Appendix–32
APPENDICES
PCL Symbol Set
0 U
2 U
0 S
0 I
1 4 J
6 J
8 M
5 M
6 M
1 5 U
1 U
1 E
1 7 U
9 T
1 9 U
9 E
5 T
7 J
1 0 J
1 3 J
Set ID Symbol Set
8 U Roman-8
0 N
2 N
ISO 8859-1 Latin1
ISO 8859-2 Latin2
5 N
1 0 U
1 1 U
1 2 U
ISO 8859-9 Latin5
PC-8
PC-8 D/N
PC-850
PC-852
PC-Turk
Windows 3.1 Latin1
Windows 3.1 Latin2
Windows 3.1 Latin5
DeskTop
PS Text
Ventura International
Ventura US
Microsoft Publishing
Math-8
PS Math
Ventura Math
PI Font
Legal
ISO 4: United Kingdom*
ISO 6: ASCII*
ISO 2: IRV*
ISO 11: Swedish: names*
ISO 15: Italian*
5 S
6 S
0 G
1 G
1 S
2 S
3 S
4 S
HP Spanish*
ISO 17: Spanish*
ISO 10: Swedish*
ISO 16: Portuguese*
ISO 84: Portuguese*
ISO 85: Spanish*
HP German*
ISO 21: German*
0 D
1 D
0 F
1 F
0 K
2 K
9 U
1 2 J
ISO 60: Norwegian 1*
ISO 61: Norwegian 2*
ISO 25: French*
ISO 69: French*
ISO 14: JIS ASCII*
ISO 57: Chinese*
Windows 3.0 Latin1
MC Text
1 9 M Symbol
5 7 9 L Wingdings
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Typeface(Continued)
LetterGothic
16.66**
Maryland
Oklahoma PC PC
Brussels Tennessee
• • • • •
•
• •
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
• •
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Utah Utah
Cond.
• •
•
• •
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
*These symbol sets are variations of the Roman-8 symbol set.
**LetterGothic 16.66 is a bitmapped font.
Appendix–33
USER’S GUIDE
Symbol Sets Supported by the Printer’s TrueType™ and Type 1
Font Compatible, and Original Typefaces
PCL Symbol Set
1 4 J
6 J
8 M
5 M
6 M
1 5 U
1 7 U
9 T
1 9 U
9 E
5 T
7 J
1 0 J
1 3 J
Set ID Symbol Set
8 U Roman-8
0 N
2 N
ISO 8859-1 Latin1
ISO 8859-2 Latin2
5 N
1 0 U
1 1 U
1 2 U
ISO 8859-9 Latin5
PC-8
PC-8 D/N
PC-850
PC-852
PC-Turk
Windows 3.1 Latin1
Windows 3.1 Latin2
Windows 3.1 Latin5
DeskTop
PS Text
Ventura International
Ventura US
Microsoft Publishing
Math-8
PS Math
Ventura Math
PI Font
0 G
1 G
0 D
1 D
3 S
4 S
5 S
6 S
0 S
0 I
1 S
2 S
1 U
1 E
0 U
2 U
Legal
ISO 4: United Kingdom*
ISO 6: ASCII*
ISO 2: IRV*
ISO 11: Swedish: names*
ISO 15: Italian*
HP Spanish*
ISO 17: Spanish*
ISO 10: Swedish*
ISO 16: Portuguese*
ISO 84: Portuguese*
ISO 85: Spanish*
HP German*
ISO 21: German*
ISO 60: Norwegian 1*
ISO 61: Norwegian 2*
0 F
1 F
0 K
2 K
ISO 25: French*
ISO 69: French*
ISO 14: JIS ASCII*
ISO 57: Chinese*
9 U
1 2 J
Windows 3.0 Latin1
MC Text
1 9 M Symbol
5 7 9 L Wingdings
Typeface
Atlanta BR CopenCalgary Helsinki Portugal TennesW
Symbol hagen see Dingbats
• • • • • •
• • •
•
• • •
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
• •
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
*These symbol sets are variations of the Roman-8 symbol set.
Appendix–34
PCL Symbol Set
0 D
1 D
0 F
1 F
5 S
6 S
0 G
1 G
1 S
2 S
3 S
4 S
0 U
2 U
0 S
0 I
1 4 J
6 J
8 M
5 M
6 M
1 5 U
1 U
1 E
1 7 U
9 T
1 9 U
9 E
5 T
7 J
1 0 J
1 3 J
Set ID Symbol Set
8 U Roman-8
0 N
2 N
ISO 8859-1 Latin1
ISO 8859-2 Latin2
5 N
1 0 U
1 1 U
1 2 U
ISO 8859-9 Latin5
PC-8
PC-8 D/N
PC-850
PC-852
PC-Turk
Windows 3.1 Latin1
Windows 3.1 Latin2
Windows 3.1 Latin5
DeskTop
PS Text
Ventura International
Ventura US
Microsoft Publishing
Math-8
PS Math
Ventura Math
PI Font
Legal
ISO 4: United Kingdom*
ISO 6: ASCII*
ISO 2: IRV*
ISO 11: Swedish: names*
ISO 15: Italian*
HP Spanish*
ISO 17: Spanish*
ISO 10: Swedish*
ISO 16: Portuguese*
ISO 84: Portuguese*
ISO 85: Spanish*
HP German*
ISO 21: German*
ISO 60: Norwegian 1*
ISO 61: Norwegian 2*
ISO 25: French*
ISO 69: French*
0 K
2 K
9 U
1 2 J
ISO 14: JIS ASCII*
ISO 57: Chinese*
Windows 3.0 Latin1
MC Text
1 9 M Symbol
5 7 9 L Wingdings
Typeface
Bermuda Script Germany
• •
• •
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
*These symbol sets are variations of the Roman-8 symbol set.
San Diego
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
US Roman
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
APPENDICES
Appendix–35
USER’S GUIDE
QUICK REFERENCE OF COMMANDS
The following tables show commands sorted by function. For further information about commands, refer to the “Technical Reference Manual,” which is optionally available.
✒ Note
l represents the lowercase l letter. Script notation is used because lowercase
l and the number 1 can be easily confused with each other.
HP LaserJet 4+ Mode
Function
CONTROL CODE
Backspace
Horizontal Tab
Line Feed
Form Feed
Carriage Return
Secondary Font Select
Primary font Select
Escape
PAGE FORMAT
Page Length
PCL Command Sets
Command
BS
HT
LF
FF
CR
SO
SI
ESC
Top Margin
Text Length
Left Margin
Right Margin
Clear Side Margin
Line Pitch
Line Spacing
1 line/inch
2 lines/inch
3 lines/inch
4 lines/inch
6 lines/inch
8 lines/inch
12 lines/inch
16 lines/inch
24 lines/inch
48 lines/inch
Character Pitch ex. 10 pitch
ESC & l # P
(# lines)
ESC & l # E
(# lines)
ESC & l # F
(# lines)
ESC & a # L
(# column)
ESC & a # M
(# column)
ESC 9
ESC & l # C
(# /48 inch)
ESC & l # D
ESC & l 1 D
ESC & l 2 D
ESC & l 3 D
ESC & l 4 D
ESC & l 6 D
ESC & l 8 D
ESC & l 12 D
ESC & l 16 D
ESC & l 24 D
ESC & l 48 D
ESC & k # H
(# /120 inch)
ESC & k 12 H
Decimal
13
14
15
27
08
09
10
12
27 38 108 ## 80
27 38 108 ## 69
27 38 108 ## 70
27 38 97 ## 76
27 38 97 ## 77
27 57
27 38 108 ## 67
27 38 108 ## 68
27 38 108 49 68
27 38 108 50 68
27 38 108 51 68
27 38 108 52 68
27 38 108 54 68
27 38 108 56 68
27 38 108 49 50 68
27 38 108 49 54 68
27 38 108 50 52 68
27 38 108 52 56 68
27 38 107 ## 72
27 38 107 49 50 72
Hexadecimal
0D
0E
0F
1B
08
09
0A
0C
1B 26 6C ## 50
1B 26 6C ## 45
1B 26 6C ## 46
1B 26 61 ## 4C
1B 26 61 ## 4D
1B 39
1B 26 6C ## 43
1B 26 6C ## 44
1B 26 6C 31 44
1B 26 6C 32 44
1B 26 6C 33 44
1B 26 6C 34 44
1B 26 6C 36 44
1B 26 6C 38 44
1B 26 6C 31 32 44
1B 26 6C 31 36 44
1B 26 6C 32 34 44
1B 26 6C 34 38 44
1B 26 6B ## 48
1B 26 6B 31 32 48
Appendix–36
APPENDICES
Function
Paper Size
Executive
Letter
Legal
A4
B5
B6
A5
A6
Envelopes
Monarch
COM 10
DL
C5
CURSOR POSITIONING
Horizontal Position
Horizontal Position
Horizontal Position
Vertical Position
Vertical Position
Vertical Position
VECTOR GRAPHICS
Enter HP-GL/2 Mode
Use Previous HP-GL/2
Pen Position
Use Current PCL CAP
HP-GL/2 Plot Horizontal Size
HP-GL/2 Plot Vertical Size
Set Picture Frame Anchor Point
Picture Frame Horizontal Size
Picture Frame Vertical Size
Command
ESC & l # A
ESC & l 1 A
ESC & l 2 A
ESC & l 3 A
ESC & l 26 A
ESC & l 100 A
ESC & l 1024 A
ESC & l 1025 A
ESC & l 1026 A
ESC & l 80 A
ESC & l 81 A
ESC & l 90 A
ESC & l 91 A
ESC & a # C
(# column)
ESC & a # H
(# decipoint)
ESC * p # X
(# dot)
ESC & a # R
(# line)
ESC & a # V
(# decipoint)
ESC * p # Y
(# dot)
Decimal Hexadecimal
27 38 108 ## 65
27 38 108 49 65
27 38 108 50 65
27 38 108 51 65
27 38 108 50 54 65
27 38 108 49 48 48 65
1B 26 6C ## 41
1B 26 6C 31 41
1B 26 6C 32 41
1B 26 6C 33 41
1B 26 6C 32 36 41
1B 26 6C 31 30 30 41
27 38 108 49 48 50 52 65 1B 26 6C 31 30 32 34 41
27 38 108 49 48 50 53 65 1B 26 6C 31 30 32 35 41
27 38 108 49 48 50 54 65 1B 26 6C 31 30 32 36 41
27 38 108 56 48 65
27 38 108 56 49 65
27 38 108 57 48 65
27 38 108 57 49 65
1B 26 6C 38 30 41
1B 26 6C 38 31 41
1B 26 6C 39 30 41
1B 26 6C 39 31 41
27 38 97 ## 67
27 38 97 ## 72
27 42 112 ## 88
27 38 97 ## 82
27 38 97 ## 86
27 42 112 ## 89
1B 26 61 ## 43
1B 26 61 ## 48
1B 2A 70 ## 58
1B 26 61 ## 52
1B 26 61 ## 56
1B 2A 70 ## 59
ESC % 0 B
ESC % 1 B
ESC * c # K
(# inch)
ESC * c # L
(# inch)
ESC * c 0 T
ESC * c # X
(# decipoint)
ESC * c # Y
(# decipoint)
27 37 48 66
27 37 49 66
27 42 99 # … # 75
27 42 99 # … # 76
27 42 99 48 84
27 42 99 # … # 88
27 42 99 # … # 89
1B 25 30 42
1B 25 31 42
1B 2A 63 # … # 4B
1B 2A 63 # … # 4C
1B 2A 63 50 54
1B 2A 63 # … # 58
1B 2A 63 # … # 59
Appendix–37
USER’S GUIDE
Function
RASTER GRAPHICS
Resolution Setting
75 dpi
100 dpi
200 dpi
150 dpi
300 dpi
600 dpi
Raster Graphics Presentation
Orientation Oriented
Raster Oriented
Begin Raster Graphics
Left-most Position
Current Position
Command
ESC * t 75 R
ESC * t 100 R
ESC * t 200 R
ESC * t 150 R
ESC * t 300 R
ESC * t 600 R
ESC * r 0 F
ESC * r 3 F
ESC * r 0 A
ESC * r 1 A
Decimal
27 42 116 55 53 82
27 42 116 49 48 48 82
27 42 116 50 48 48 82
27 42 116 49 53 48 82
27 42 116 51 48 48 82
27 42 116 54 48 48 82
27 42 114 48 70
27 42 114 51 70
27 42 114 48 65
27 42 114 49 65
Hexadecimal
1B 2A 74 37 35 52
1B 2A 74 31 30 30 52
1B 2A 74 32 30 30 52
1B 2A 74 31 35 30 52
1B 2A 74 33 30 30 52
1B 2A 74 36 30 30 52
1B 2A 72 30 46
1B 2A 72 33 46
1B 2A 72 30 41
1B 2A 72 31 41
Transfer Data ESC * b # W [data] 27 42 98 ## 87
(# byte)
1B 2A 62 ## 57
Set Compression Mode
Uncoded
Run-Length Encoded
Tagged Image File Format
Delta Row
Mode 5
Mode 9
CCITT G3/G4 (original) ESC * b 1152 M
TIFF (for 600 dpi only, original) ESC * b 1024 M
1200 dpi Image Format ESC * b 1027 M
(for 1200 dpi only, original)
Compress Transfer
Raster Y Offset
Raster Height
27 42 98 49 49 53 50 77
27 42 98 49 48 50 52 77
27 42 98 49 48 50 55 77
ESC * b # C [data] 27 42 98 ## 67
(# byte)
27 42 98 # … # 89 ESC * b # Y
(# Line)
ESC * r # T 27 42 114 # … # 84
1B 2A 62 31 31 35 32 4D
1B 2A 62 31 30 32 34 4D
1B 2A 62 31 30 32 37 4D
1B 2A 62 ## 43
1B 2A 62 # … # 59
1B 2A 72 # … # 54
Raster Width
End Raster Graphics
ESC * b 0 M
ESC * b 1 M
ESC * b 2 M
ESC * b 3 M
ESC * b 5 M
ESC * b 9 M
(# Row)
ESC * r # S
(# Pixel)
ESC * r B
27 42 98 48 77
27 42 98 49 77
27 42 98 50 77
27 42 98 51 77
27 42 98 53 77
27 42 98 57 77
27 42 114 # … # 83
27 42 114 66
1B 2A 62 30 4D
1B 2A 62 31 4D
1B 2A 62 32 4D
1B 2A 62 33 4D
1B 2A 62 35 4D
1B 2A 62 39 4D
1B 2A 72 # … # 53
1B 2A 72 42
PRINT MODEL
Select Pattern
Solid Black (default)
Solid White
HP-defined Shading Pattern
HP-defined Cross-Hatched
ESC * v 0 T
ESC * v 1 T
ESC * v 2 T
ESC * v 3 T
Pattern
User defined ESC * v 4 T
Brother-defined Shading Pattern ESC * v 130 T
(64 steps, original)
Select Source Transparency Mode
Transparent
Opaque
Select Pattern Transparency Mode
Transparent
Opaque
ESC * v 0 N
ESC * v 1 N
ESC * v 0 O
ESC * v 1 O
27 42 118 48 84
27 42 118 49 84
27 42 118 50 84
27 42 118 51 84
27 42 118 52 84
27 42 118 49 51 48 84
27 42 118 48 78
27 42 118 49 78
27 42 118 48 79
27 42 118 49 79
1B 2A 76 30 54
1B 2A 76 31 54
1B 2A 76 32 54
1B 2A 76 33 54
1B 2A 76 34 54
1B 2A 76 31 33 30 54
1B 2A 76 30 42
1B 2A 76 31 42
1B 2A 76 30 43
1B 2A 76 31 43
Appendix–38
Function
PATTERN
Horizontal Size
Horizontal Size
Vertical Size
Vertical Size
Pattern ID Setting
(See note below.)
2% Gray
10% Gray
15 % Gray
30% Gray
45% Gray
70% Gray
90% Gray
100% Gray
Command
ESC * c # A
(# dot)
ESC * c # H
(# decipoint)
ESC * c # B
(# dot)
ESC * c # V
(# decipoint)
ESC * c # G
(#: ID)
ESC * c 2 G
ESC * c 10 G
ESC * c 15 G
ESC * c 30 G
ESC * c 45 G
ESC * c 70 G
ESC * c 90 G
ESC * c 100 G
Decimal
27 42 99 ## 65
27 42 99 ## 72
27 42 99 ## 66
27 42 99 ## 86
27 42 99 ## 71
27 42 99 50 71
27 42 99 49 48 71
27 42 99 49 53 71
27 42 99 51 48 71
27 42 99 52 53 71
27 42 99 55 48 71
27 42 99 57 48 71
27 42 99 49 48 48 71
APPENDICES
Hexadecimal
1B 2A 63 ## 41
1B 2A 63 ## 48
1B 2A 63 ## 42
1B 2A 63 ## 56
1B 2A 63 ## 71
1B 2A 63 32 47
1B 2A 63 31 30 47
1B 2A 63 31 35 47
1B 2A 63 33 30 47
1B 2A 63 34 35 47
1B 2A 63 37 30 47
1B 2A 63 39 30 47
1B 2A 63 31 30 30 47
✒ Note
These gray settings can be expressed in 64 shades with ESC * v 130T and
ESC * c 130 P.
Appendix–39
USER’S GUIDE
Function
1 Horiz. Line
2 Vert. Lines
3 Diagonal Lines
4 Diagonal Lines
5 Square Grid
6 Diagonal Grid
Print pattern
Solid Black
Erase (Solid White Area Fill)
Shaded Fill
Cross-hatched Fill
User defined
Current Pattern
Brother-defined Shading Fill
(64 steps, original)
Define Pattern
User-defined Pattern Control
Delete All
Delete Temporary
Delete Current Pattern
Make Temporary
Make Permanent
Set Pattern Reference Point
Print Direction Oriented
Logical Page Oriented
Command
ESC * c 1 G
ESC * c 2 G
ESC * c 3 G
ESC * c 4 G
ESC * c 5 G
ESC * c 6 G
ESC * c 0 P
ESC * c 1 P
ESC * c 2 P
ESC * c 3 P
ESC * c 4 P
ESC * c 5 P
ESC * c 130 P
ESC * c # W
(#: byte)
ESC * c 0 Q
ESC * c 1 Q
ESC * c 2 Q
ESC * c 4 Q
ESC * c 5 Q
ESC * p 0 R
ESC * p 1 R
Decimal
27 42 99 49 71
27 42 99 50 71
27 42 99 51 71
27 42 99 52 71
27 42 99 53 71
27 42 99 54 71
27 42 99 48 80
27 42 99 49 80
27 42 99 50 80
27 42 99 51 80
27 42 99 52 80
27 42 99 53 80
27 42 99 49 51 48 80
1B 2A 63 ## 51
1B 2A 63 30 51
1B 2A 63 31 51
1B 2A 63 32 51
1B 2A 63 34 51
1B 2A 63 35 51
1B 2A 70 30 52
1B 2A 70 31 52
Hexadecimal
1B 2A 63 31 47
1B 2A 63 32 47
1B 2A 63 33 47
1B 2A 63 34 47
1B 2A 63 35 47
1B 2A 63 36 47
1B 2A 63 30 50
1B 2A 63 31 50
1B 2A 63 32 50
1B 2A 63 33 50
1B 2A 63 34 50
1B 2A 63 35 50
1B 2A 63 31 33 30 50
27 42 99 ## 87
27 42 99 48 81
27 42 99 49 81
27 42 99 50 81
27 42 99 52 81
27 42 99 53 81
27 42 112 48 82
27 42 112 49 82
Appendix–40
APPENDICES
Function Command Decimal Hexadecimal
DOWNLOAD FONT
Font ID Set
Character Code Set
ESC * c # D
(#: ID)
27 42 99 ## 68
ESC * c # E
(##: chara. code)
27 42 99 ## 69
Download Control
Delete All
Delete Temporary
Delete Current ID
ESC * c 0 F
ESC * c 1 F
ESC * c 2 F
Delete Current Character Code ESC * c 3 F
Make Temporary ESC * c 4 F
Make Permanent ESC * c 5 F
27 42 99 48 70
27 42 99 49 70
27 42 99 50 70
27 42 99 51 70
27 42 99 52 70
27 42 99 53 70
27 42 99 54 70 Copy Assign ESC * c 6 F
Download Font/Flash Memory Card (original)
Delete One from Card ESC * c 1026 F
Delete All from Card
Save Current Font into Card
Set to Primary Font
ESC * c 1028 F
ESC * c 1029 F
ESC ( # X
27 42 99 49 48 50 54 70
27 40 ## 88
1B 2A 63 ## 44
1B 2A 63 ## 45
1B 2A 63 30 46
1B 2A 63 31 46
1B 2A 63 32 46
1B 2A 63 33 46
1B 2A 63 34 46
1B 2A 63 35 46
1B 2A 63 36 46
1B 2A 63 31 30 32 36 46
27 42 99 49 48 50 56 70 1B 2A 63 31 30 32 38 46
27 42 99 49 48 50 57 70 1B 2A 63 31 30 32 39 46
1B 28 ## 58
Set to Secondary Font
(#: font ID)
ESC ) # X
(#: font ID)
27 41 ## 88 1B 29 ## 58
Font Default Setting
Primary 27 40 ## 64 1B 28 ## 40
Secondary
Download Font Header
Download Character
ESC ( # @
(#: control)
ESC ) # @
(#: control)
ESC ) s # W
(#: byte)
ESC ( s # W
(#: byte)
27 41 ## 64
27 41 115 ## 87
27 40 115 ## 87
1B 29 ## 40
1B 29 73 ## 57
1B 28 73 ## 57
Appendix–41
USER’S GUIDE
Function
USER-DEFINED SYMBOL SET
Symbol Set ID Set
Command
Define Symbol Set
ESC * c # R
(#: ID)
ESC ( f # W
(#: byte)
Symbol Set Control
Delete All
Delete Temporary
Delete Current ID
Make Temporary
Make Permanent
ESC * c 0 S
ESC * c 1 S
ESC * c 2 S
ESC * c 4 S
ESC * c 5 S
MACRO
Macro ID Set ESC & f # Y
(#: ID)
Macro Control
Start Macro Definition
End Macro Definition
Execute Macro
Call Macro
Macro Overlay ON
Macro Overlay OFF
Delete All Macros
Delete Temporary Macro
Delete Current Macro
Make Temporary Macro
Make Permanent Macro
ESC & f 0 X
ESC & f 1 X
ESC & f 2 X
ESC & f 3 X
ESC & f 4 X
ESC & f 5 X
ESC & f 6 X
ESC & f 7 X
ESC & f 8 X
ESC & f 9 X
ESC & f 10 X
Macro/Card (original)
Delete All Macros from Card
Delete Current Macro
ESC & f 1030 X
ESC & f 1036 X
from Card
Save Current Macro into Card ESC & f 1038 X
STATUS READBACK
Set Status Readback Location Type
Invalid Location
Currently Selected
All Locations
Internal
Downloaded
Cartridge
Option ROM Socket
Set Status Readback Location Unit
All Entities of Location Type
Entity 1 or Temporary
Entity 2 or Permanent
Entity 3
Entity 4
Inquire Status Readback Entity
Font
Macro
User-defined Pattern
Symbol Set
Font Extended
ESC * s 0 T
ESC * s 1 T
ESC * s 2 T
ESC * s 3 T
ESC * s 4 T
ESC * s 5 T
ESC * s 7 T
ESC * s 0 U
ESC * s 1 U
ESC * s 2 U
ESC * s 3 U
ESC * s 4 U
ESC * s 0 I
ESC * s 1 I
ESC * s 2 I
ESC * s 3 I
ESC * s 4 I
Decimal
27 42 99 ## 82
27 40 102 ## 87
27 42 99 48 83
27 42 99 49 83
27 42 99 50 83
27 42 99 52 83
27 42 99 53 83
27 38 102 ## 89
Hexadecimal
1B 2A 63 ## 52
1B 28 66 ## 46
1B 2A 63 30 53
1B 2A 63 31 53
1B 2A 63 32 53
1B 2A 63 34 53
1B 2A 63 35 53
1B 26 66 ## 59
27 38 102 48 88
27 38 102 49 88
27 38 102 50 88
27 38 102 51 88
27 38 102 52 88
27 38 102 53 88
27 38 102 54 88
27 38 102 55 88
27 38 102 56 88
27 38 102 57 88
27 38 102 49 48 88
1B 26 66 30 58
1B 26 66 31 58
1B 26 66 32 58
1B 26 66 33 58
1B 26 66 34 58
1B 26 66 35 58
1B 26 66 36 58
1B 26 66 37 58
1B 26 66 38 58
1B 26 66 39 58
1B 26 66 31 30 58
27 38 102 49 48 51 48 88 1B 26 66 31 30 33 30 58
27 38 102 49 48 51 54 88 1B 26 66 31 30 33 36 58
27 38 102 49 48 51 56 88 1B 26 66 31 30 33 38 58
27 42 115 48 84
27 42 115 49 84
27 42 115 50 84
27 42 115 51 84
27 42 115 52 84
27 42 115 53 84
27 42 115 55 84
27 42 115 48 85
27 42 115 49 85
27 42 115 50 85
27 42 115 51 85
27 42 115 52 85
27 42 115 48 73
27 42 115 49 73
27 42 115 50 73
27 42 115 51 73
27 42 115 52 73
1B 2A 73 30 54
1B 2A 73 31 54
1B 2A 73 32 54
1B 2A 73 33 54
1B 2A 73 34 54
1B 2A 73 35 54
1B 2A 73 37 54
1B 2A 73 30 55
1B 2A 73 31 55
1B 2A 73 32 55
1B 2A 73 33 55
1B 2A 73 34 55
1B 2A 73 30 49
1B 2A 73 31 49
1B 2A 73 32 49
1B 2A 73 33 49
1B 2A 73 34 49
Appendix–42
Function
Flush All Pages
Flush All Complete Pages
Flush All Page Data
Free Memory Space
Echo
OTHER COMMANDS
Push Cursor Position
Pop Cursor Position
Display Function
ON
OFF
Transparent Print
Perforation Skip
ON
OFF
End of Line Wrap
ON
OFF
Auto Underline
ON
Fix
Float
OFF
Half Line Feed
Line Termination
CR=CR, LF=LF, FF=FF
CR=CR+LF, LF=LF, FF=FF
CR=CR, LF=LF+CR,
FF=FF+CR
CR=CR+LF, LF=LF+CR,
FF=FF+CR
Print Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Reverse Portrait
Reverse Landscape
Print Direction
Copy Volume
Paper Input Control
Paper Eject
Feed From Upper Cassette
(TRAY 1)
Manual Feed
Envelope
Feed From MP Tray
Feed From Lower Cassette
(TRAY 2 or Option)
ESC & l 0 O
ESC & l 1 O
ESC & l 2 O
ESC & l 3 O
ESC & a # P
(# degree)
ESC & l # X
ESC & l 0 H
ESC & l 1 H
ESC & l 2 H
ESC & l 3 H
ESC & l 4 H
ESC & l 5 H
Command Decimal
ESC & r 0 F
ESC & r 1 F
ESC * s 1 M
ESC * s # X
# = Echo value
(-32767 to 32767)
27 38 114 48 70
27 38 114 49 70
27 42 115 49 77
27 42 115 # … # 88
ESC & f 0 S
ESC & f 1 S
ESC Y
ESC Z
ESC & p # X
(# byte)
ESC & l 1 L
ESC & l 0 L
ESC & s 0 C
ESC & s 1 C
ESC & d # D
ESC & d 0 D
ESC & d 3 D
ESC & d @
ESC =
ESC & k 0 G
ESC & k 1 G
ESC & k 2 G
ESC & k 3 G
27 38 102 48 83
27 38 102 49 83
27 89
27 90
27 38 112 ## 88
27 38 108 49 76
27 38 108 48 76
27 38 115 48 67
27 38 115 49 67
27 38 100 ## 68
27 38 100 48 68
27 38 100 51 68
27 38 100 64
27 61
27 38 107 48 71
27 38 107 49 71
27 38 107 50 71
27 38 107 51 71
27 38 108 48 79
27 38 108 49 79
27 38 108 50 79
27 38 108 51 79
27 38 97 # … # 80
27 38 108 ## 88
27 38 108 48 72
27 38 108 49 72
27 38 108 50 72
27 38 108 51 72
27 38 108 52 72
27 38 108 53 72
APPENDICES
Hexadecimal
1B 26 72 30 46
1B 26 72 31 46
1B 2A 73 31 4D
1B 2A 73 # … # 58
1B 26 66 30 53
1B 26 66 31 53
1B 59
1B 5A
1B 26 70 ## 58
1B 26 6C 31 4C
1B 26 6C 30 4C
1B 26 73 30 43
1B 26 73 31 43
1B 26 64 ## 44
1B 26 64 30 44
1B 26 64 33 44
1B 26 64 40
1B 3D
1B 26 6B 30 47
1B 26 6B 31 47
1B 26 6B 32 47
1B 26 6B 33 47
1B 26 6C 30 4F
1B 26 6C 31 4F
1B 26 6C 32 4F
1B 26 6C 33 4F
1B 26 61 # … # 50
1B 26 6C ## 58
1B 26 6C 30 48
1B 26 6C 31 48
1B 26 6C 32 48
1B 26 6C 33 48
1B 26 6C 34 48
1B 26 6C 35 48
Appendix–43
USER’S GUIDE
Function Command Decimal
Simplex/Duplex Print (Available when Duplex Unit is installed)
Duplex & Long-Edge Binding ESC & l 1 S
Duplex & Short-Edge Binding ESC & l 2 S
27 38 108 49 83
27 38 108 50 83
Paper Side Selection (Available when Duplex Unit is installed)
Next Side ESC & a 0 G 27 38 97 48 71
Front Side
Back Side
Long-edge Offset
ESC & a 1 G
ESC & a 2 G
ESC & l # U
(#/720 inch)
27 38 97 49 71
27 38 97 50 71
27 38 108 ## 85
Short-edge Offset 27 38 108 ## 90
Printer Reset
Self-test
Job Separation
Unit of Measure
ESC & l # Z
(#/720 inch)
ESC E
ESC z
ESC & l # T
ESC & u # D
(# = Units/inch)
27 69
27 122
27 38 108 ## 84
27 38 117 # … # 68
Go to Other Emulations (original)
BR-Script 2 Batch Mode
BR-Script 2 Interactive Mode
HP-GL
IBM Proprinter XL
ESC CR A B
ESC CR A I
ESC CR G L
ESC CR I
EPSON FX-850 ESC CR E
High Resolution Control (HRC) (original)
Set HRC Off
Set HRC to Light Level
Set HRC to Medium Level
Set HRC to Dark Level
User Reset (original)
Restore to User Settings
ESC CR R O
ESC CR R L
ESC CR R M
ESC CR R D
ESC CR ! # R
# = 0 to 2
Factory Reset (original)
Restore to Factory Settings
Execute Card Data (original)
Execute saved card data
ESC CR F D
ESC CR ! # E
27 13 65 66
27 13 65 73
27 13 71 76
27 13 73
27 13 69
27 13 82 79
27 13 82 76
27 13 82 77
27 13 82 68
27 13 33 # 82
27 13 70 68
27 13 33 # 69
FONT SELECTION
Symbol Set
ISO 60: Norwegian 1
ISO 61: Norwegian 2
ISO 4: United Kingdom
Windows 3.1 Latin1
ISO 25: French
ISO 69: French
HP German
ESC ( 0 D
ESC ( 1 D
ESC ( 1 E
ESC ( 9 E
ESC ( 0 F
ESC ( 1 F
ESC ( 0 G
ISO 21: German
ISO 15: Italian
Microsoft Publishing
Desk Top
PS Text
MC Text
Ventura International
Ventura US
ESC ( 1 G
ESC ( 0 I
ESC ( 6 J
ESC ( 7 J
ESC ( 10 J
ESC ( 12 J
ESC ( 13 J
ESC ( 14 J
ISO 14: JIS ASCII
ISO 57: Chinese
ESC ( 0 K
ESC ( 2 K
ISO 8859-1 (ECMA-94) Latin1 ESC ( 0 N
27 40 48 68
27 40 49 68
27 40 49 69
27 40 57 69
27 40 48 70
27 40 49 70
27 40 48 71
27 40 49 71
27 40 48 73
27 40 54 74
27 40 55 74
27 40 49 48 74
27 40 49 50 74
27 40 49 51 74
27 40 49 52 74
27 40 48 75
27 40 50 75
27 40 48 78
1B 28 30 44
1B 28 31 44
1B 28 31 45
1B 28 39 45
1B 28 30 46
1B 28 31 46
1B 28 30 47
1B 28 31 47
1B 28 30 49
1B 28 36 4A
1B 28 37 4A
1B 28 31 30 4A
1B 28 31 32 4A
1B 28 31 33 4A
1B 28 31 34 4A
1B 28 30 4B
1B 28 32 4B
1B 28 30 4E
1B 0D 41 42
1B 0D 41 49
1B 0D 47 4C
1B 0D 49
1B 0D 45
1B 0D 52 4F
1B 0D 52 4C
1B 0D 52 4D
1B 0D 52 44
1B 0D 21 # 52
1B 0D 46 44
1B 0D 21 # 45
Hexadecimal
1B 26 6C 30 53
1B 26 6C 31 53
1B 26 6C 32 53
1B 26 61 30 47
1B 26 61 31 47
1B 26 61 30 47
1B 26 6C ## 55
1B 26 6C ## 5A
1B 45
1B 7A
1B 26 6C ## 54
1B 26 75 # … # 44
Appendix–44
Function
Wingdings
PS Math
Ventura Math
Math-8
Symbol
ISO 8859-2 Latin2
ISO 8859-5 Latin5
ISO 11: Swedish
HP Spanish
ISO 17: Spanish
ISO 10: Swedish
ISO 16: Portuguese
ISO 84: Portuguese
ISO 85: Spanish
Windows 3.1 Latin5
PC Turkish
ISO 6: ASCII
Legal
ISO 2: IRV
Roman 8
Windows 3.0 Latin1
PC-8
PC-8 D/N
PC 850
Pi Font
PC-852
Windows 3.1 Latin1
Character Set (original)
ROMAN 8
US ASCII
GERMAN
UK ENGLISH
FRENCH
DUTCH
ITALIAN
S. SPANISH
A. ENGLISH W.P.
U.K. ASCII/2
SYMBOL*
INTERNATIONAL
AMERICAN ENGLISH
U.K. ASCII
PORTUGUESE
SWISS GERMAN
AMERICAN SPANISH
NORWEGIAN
CANADIAN
FINNISH/SWEDISH
SOUTH AFRICA
JAPANESE ENGLISH
Command
ESC ( 6 S
ESC ( 5 T
ESC ( 9 T
ESC ( 0 U
ESC ( 1 U
ESC ( 2 U
ESC ( 8 U
ESC ( 9 U
ESC ( 10 U
ESC ( 11 U
ESC ( 12 U
ESC ( 15 U
ESC ( 17 U
ESC ( 19 U
ESC ( 579 L
ESC ( 5 M
ESC ( 6 M
ESC ( 8 M
ESC ( 19 M
ESC ( 2 N
ESC ( 5 N
ESC ( 0 S
ESC ( 1 S
ESC ( 2 S
ESC ( 3 S
ESC ( 4 S
ESC ( 5 S
ESC ( s 1 C
ESC ( s 2 C
ESC ( s 3 C
ESC ( s 4 C
ESC ( s 5 C
ESC ( s 6 C
ESC ( s 7 C
ESC ( s 8 C
ESC ( s 9 C
ESC ( s 10 C
ESC ( s 11 C
ESC ( s 12 C
ESC ( s 13 C
ESC ( s 14 C
ESC ( s 15 C
ESC ( s 16 C
ESC ( s 17 C
ESC ( s 18 C
ESC ( s 19 C
ESC ( s 20 C
ESC ( s 21 C
ESC ( s 37 C
Decimal
27 40 53 55 57 76
27 40 53 77
27 40 54 77
27 40 56 77
27 40 49 57 77
27 40 50 78
27 40 53 78
27 40 48 83
27 40 49 83
27 40 50 83
27 40 51 83
27 40 52 83
27 40 53 83
27 40 54 83
27 40 53 84
27 40 57 84
27 40 48 85
27 40 49 85
27 40 50 85
27 40 56 85
27 40 57 85
27 40 49 48 85
27 40 49 49 85
27 40 49 50 85
27 40 49 53 85
27 40 49 55 85
27 40 49 57 85
27 40 115 49 67
27 40 115 50 67
27 40 115 51 67
27 40 115 52 67
27 40 115 53 67
27 40 115 54 67
27 40 115 55 67
27 40 115 56 67
27 40 115 57 67
27 40 115 49 48 67
27 40 115 49 49 67
27 40 115 49 50 67
27 40 115 49 51 67
27 40 115 49 52 67
27 40 115 49 53 67
27 40 115 49 54 67
27 40 115 49 55 67
27 40 115 49 56 67
27 40 115 49 57 67
27 40 115 50 48 67
27 40 115 50 49 67
27 40 115 51 55 67
*The symbol character set is not available for Tennessee and Helsinki fonts.
Hexadecimal
1B 28 35 37 39 4C
1B 28 35 4D
1B 28 36 4D
1B 28 38 4D
1B 28 31 39 4D
1B 28 32 4E
1B 28 35 4E
1B 28 30 53
1B 28 31 53
1B 28 32 53
1B 28 33 53
1B 28 34 53
1B 28 35 53
1B 28 36 53
1B 28 35 54
1B 28 39 54
1B 28 30 55
1B 28 31 55
1B 28 32 55
1B 28 38 55
1B 28 39 55
1B 28 31 30 55
1B 28 31 31 55
1B 28 31 32 55
1B 28 31 35 55
1B 28 31 37 55
1B 28 31 39 55
1B 28 73 31 43
1B 28 73 32 43
1B 28 73 33 43
1B 28 73 34 43
1B 28 73 35 43
1B 28 73 36 43
1B 28 73 37 43
1B 28 73 38 43
1B 28 73 39 43
1B 28 73 31 30 43
1B 28 73 31 31 43
1B 28 73 31 32 43
1B 28 73 31 33 43
1B 28 73 31 34 43
1B 28 73 31 35 43
1B 28 73 31 36 43
1B 28 73 31 37 43
1B 28 73 31 38 43
1B 28 73 31 39 43
1B 28 73 32 30 43
1B 28 73 32 31 43
1B 28 73 33 37 43
APPENDICES
Appendix–45
USER’S GUIDE
Function
PC-8
PC-8 D/N
PC-850
PC-860
Command
ESC ( s 25 C
ESC ( s 23 C
ESC ( s 26 C
ESC ( s 27 C
ESC ( s 28 C
ESC ( s 29 C
PC-863
PC-865
Fixed Pitch or P.S.
Fixed
P.S.
Character Pitch Selection 1
ESC ( s 0 P
ESC ( s 1 P
ESC ( s # H
(#: char./inch)
Character Pitch Selection 2
10 Pitch
16.6 Pitch
12 Pitch
Point Size
ESC & k 0 S
ESC & k 2 S
ESC & k 4 S
ESC ( s # V
(#: point size)
Italics or upright
Italics
Upright
Condensed
Condensed Italic
ESC ( s 1 S
ESC ( s 0 S
ESC ( s 4 S
ESC ( s 5 S
Compressed (Extra Condensed) ESC ( s 8 S
Expanded ESC ( s 24 S
Outline ESC ( s 32 S
Inline
Shadowed
Outline Shadowed
Stroke Weight
Ultra Thin
Extra Thin
ESC ( s 64 S
ESC ( s 128 S
ESC ( s 160 S
ESC ( s # B
ESC ( s-7B
ESC ( s-6B
Thin
Extra Light
Light
Demi Light
Semi Light
Medium (Normal)
Semi Bold
Demi Bold
Bold
Extra Bold
Black
Extra Black
Ultra Black
ESC ( s-5B
ESC ( s-4B
ESC ( s-3B
ESC ( s-2B
ESC ( s-1B
ESC ( s 0 B
ESC ( s 1 B
ESC ( s 2 B
ESC ( s 3 B
ESC ( s 4 B
ESC ( s 5 B
ESC ( s 6 B
ESC ( s 7 B
Scalable Font Ratio (original)
Set horizontal ratio
(#=0.25 to 3 step 0.01)
Set vertical ratio
(#=0.25 to 3 step 0.01)
ESC CR ! # H
ESC CR ! # V
Decimal
27 40 115 50 53 67
27 40 115 50 51 67
27 40 115 50 54 67
27 40 115 50 55 67
27 40 115 50 56 67
27 40 115 50 57 67
27 40 115 48 80
27 40 115 49 80
27 40 115 ## 72
27 38 107 48 83
27 38 107 50 83
27 38 107 52 83
27 40 115 ## 86
27 40 115 49 83
27 40 115 48 83
27 40 115 52 83
27 40 115 53 83
27 40 115 56 83
27 40 115 50 52 83
27 40 115 51 50 83
27 40 115 54 52 83
27 40 115 49 50 56 83
27 40 115 49 54 48 83
27 40 115 ## 66
27 40 115 2D 55 66
27 40 115 2D 54 66
27 40 115 2D 53 66
27 40 115 2D 52 66
27 40 115 2D 51 66
27 40 115 2D 50 66
27 40 115 2D 49 66
27 40 115 48 66
27 40 115 49 66
27 40 115 50 66
27 40 115 51 66
27 40 115 52 66
27 40 115 53 66
27 40 115 54 66
27 40 115 55 66
27 13 33 # 72
27 13 33 # 86
Hexadecimal
1B 28 73 32 35 43
1B 28 73 32 33 43
1B 28 73 32 36 43
1B 28 73 32 37 43
1B 28 73 32 38 43
1B 28 73 32 39 43
1B 28 73 30 50
1B 28 73 31 50
1B 28 73 ## 48
1B 26 6B 30 53
1B 26 6B 32 53
1B 26 6B 34 53
1B 28 73 ## 56
1B 28 73 31 53
1B 28 73 30 53
1B 28 73 34 53
1B 28 73 35 53
1B 28 73 38 53
1B 28 73 32 34 53
1B 28 73 33 32 53
1B 28 73 36 34 53
1B 28 73 31 32 38 53
1B 28 73 31 36 30 53
1B 28 73 ## 42
1B 28 73 45 37 42
1B 28 73 45 36 42
1B 28 73 45 35 42
1B 28 73 45 34 42
1B 28 73 45 33 42
1B 28 73 45 32 42
1B 28 73 45 31 42
1B 28 73 30 42
1B 28 73 31 42
1B 28 73 32 42
1B 28 73 33 42
1B 28 73 34 42
1B 28 73 35 42
1B 28 73 36 42
1B 28 73 37 42
1B 0D 21 # 48
1B 0D 21 # 56
Appendix–46
Function Command
Scalable Fonts
Intellifont-compatible Fonts (##: point size)
Alaska ESC ( s 1 p ## v 0 s 1 b 4 3 6 2 T
Alaska Extrabold
Antique Oakland
Antique Oakland Bold
ESC ( s 1 p ## v 0 s 4 b 4 3 6 2 T
ESC ( s 1 p ## v 0 s 0 b 4 1 6 8 T
ESC ( s 1 p ## v 0 s 3 b 4 1 6 8 T
Antique Oakland Oblique
Brougham
Brougham Bold
Brougham Oblique
Brougham BoldOblique
Cleveland Condensed
ESC ( s 1 p ## v 1 s 0 b 4 1 6 8 T
ESC ( s 0 p ## h 0 s 0 b 4 0 9 9 T
ESC ( s 0 p ## h 0 s 3 b 4 0 9 9 T
ESC ( s 0 p ## h 1 s 0 b 4 0 9 9 T
ESC ( s 0 p ## h 1 s 3 b 4 0 9 9 T
ESC ( s 1 p ## v 4 s 3 b 4 1 4 0 T
Connecticut
Guatemala Antique
Guatemala Italic
Guatemala Bold
Guatemala Boldltalic
LetterGothic
LetterGothic Bold
LetterGothic Oblique
Maryland
Oklahoma
Oklahoma Bold
Oklahoma Oblique
ESC ( s 1 p ## v 1 s 0 b 4 1 1 6 T
ESC ( s 1 p ## v 0 s 0 b 4 1 9 7 T
ESC ( s 1 p ## v 0 s 3 b 4 1 9 7 T
ESC ( s 1 p ## v 1 s 0 b 4 1 9 7 T
ESC ( s 1 p ## v 1 s 3 b 4 1 9 7 T
ESC ( s 0 p ## h 0 s 0 b 4 1 0 2 T
ESC ( s 0 p ## h 0 s 3 b 4 1 0 2 T
ESC ( s 0 p ## h 1 s 0 b 4 1 0 2 T
ESC ( s 1 p ## v 0 s 0 b 4 2 9 7 T
ESC ( s 1 p ## v 0 s 0 b 4 1 1 3 T
ESC ( s 1 p ## v 0 s 3 b 4 1 1 3 T
ESC ( s 1 p ## v 1 s 0 b 4 1 1 3 T
Oklahoma BoldOblique
PC Brussels Light
PC Brussels Demi
PC Brussels LightItalic
PC Brussels DemiItalic
PC Tennessee Roman
PC Tennessee Bold
PC Tennessee Italic
PC Tennessee BoldItalic
Utah
Utah Bold
Utah Oblique
ESC ( s 1 p ## v 1 s 3 b 4 1 1 3 T
ESC ( s 1 p ## v 0 s - 3 b 4 1 4 3 T
ESC ( s 1 p ## v 0 s 2 b 4 1 4 3 T
ESC ( s 1 p ## v 1 s - 3 b 4 1 4 3 T
ESC ( s 1 p ## v 1 s 2 b 4 1 4 3 T
ESC ( s 1 p ## v 0 s 0 b 4 1 0 1 T
ESC ( s 1 p ## v 0 s 3 b 4 1 0 1 T
ESC ( s 1 p ## v 1 s 0 b 4 1 0 1 T
ESC ( s 1 p ## v 1 s 3 b 4 1 0 1 T
ESC ( s 1 p ## v 0 s 0 b 4 1 4 8 T
ESC ( s 1 p ## v 0 s 3 b 4 1 4 8 T
ESC ( s 1 p ## v 1 s 0 b 4 1 4 8 T
Utah BoldOblique
Utah Condensed
Utah Condensed Bold
ESC ( s 1 p ## v 1 s 3 b 4 1 4 8 T
ESC ( s 1 p ## v 4 s 0 b 4 1 4 8 T
ESC ( s 1 p ## v 4 s 3 b 4 1 4 8 T
Utah Condensed Oblique
Utah Condensed BoldOblique
ESC ( s 1 p ## v 5 s 0 b 4 1 4 8 T
ESC ( s 1 p ## v 5 s 3 b 4 1 4 8 T
TrueType-compatible Fonts (##: point size)
BR Symbol
Helsinki
Helsinki Bold
Helsinki Oblique
Helsinki BoldOblique
Tennessee Roman
Tennessee Bold
Tennessee Italic
Tennessee BoldItalic
W Dingbats
ESC ( 1 9 M ESC ( s 1 p ## v 0 s 0 b 1 6 6 8 6 T
ESC ( s 1 p ## v 0 s 0 b 1 6 6 0 2 T
ESC ( s 1 p ## v 0 s 3 b 1 6 6 0 2 T
ESC ( s 1 p ## v 1 s 0 b 1 6 6 0 2 T
ESC ( s 1 p ## v 1 s 3 b 1 6 6 0 2 T
ESC ( s 1 p ## v 0 s 0 b 1 6 9 0 1 T
ESC ( s 1 p ## v 0 s 3 b 1 6 9 0 1 T
ESC ( s 1 p ## v 1 s 0 b 1 6 9 0 1 T
ESC ( s 1 p ## v 1 s 3 b 1 6 9 0 1 T
ESC ( 5 7 9 L ESC ( s 1 p ## v 0 s 0 b 3 1 4 0 2 T
APPENDICES
Appendix–47
USER’S GUIDE
Function Command
Type 1 Font Compatible Fonts (##: point size)
Atlanta Book ESC ( s 1 p ## v 0 s 0 b 1 5 5 T
Atlanta Demi ESC ( s 1 p ## v 0 s 3 b 1 5 5 T
Atlanta BookOblique
Atlanta DemiOblique
Calgary MediumItalic
ESC ( s 1 p ## v 1 s 0 b 1 5 5 T
ESC ( s 1 p ## v 1 s 3 b 1 5 5 T
ESC ( s 1 p ## v 1 s 0 b 1 5 9 T
Copenhagen Roman
Copenhagen Bold
Copenhagen Italic
Copenhagen BoldItalic
Portugal Roman
Portugal Bold
ESC ( s 1 p ## v 0 s 0 b 1 5 7 T
ESC ( s 1 p ## v 0 s 3 b 1 5 7 T
ESC ( s 1 p ## v 1 s 0 b 1 5 7 T
ESC ( s 1 p ## v 1 s 3 b 1 5 7 T
ESC ( s 1 p ## v 0 s 0 b 1 5 8 T
ESC ( s 1 p ## v 0 s 3 b 1 5 8 T
ESC ( s 1 p ## v 1 s 0 b 1 5 8 T
ESC ( s 1 p ## v 1 s 3 b 1 5 8 T
Portugal Italic
Portugal BoldItalic
Bitmapped Fonts
LetterGothic16.66
OCR-A
OCR-B
ESC ( s 0 p 16.67 h 8.5 v 0 s 0 b 1 3 0 T
ESC ( 0 O ESC ( s 0 p 10 h 12 v 0 s 0 b 1 0 4 T
ESC ( 1 O ESC ( s 0 p 10 h 12 v 0 s 0 b 1 1 0 T
Brother Original Fonts
Bermuda Script
Germany
San Diego
US Roman
ESC ( s 1 p ## v 0 s 3 b 1 3 4 T
ESC ( s 1 p ## v 0 s 3 b 1 3 2 T
ESC ( s 1 p ## v 0 s 5 b 1 3 3 T
ESC ( s 1 p ## v 0 s 0 b 1 3 5 T
Appendix–48
APPENDICES
CCITT G3/G4 and TIFF (original command)
One of the unique features of the PCL mode of this printer is it supports
CCITT G3/G4 type data compression and TIFF format.
■ CCITT G3/G4 (Raster Graphic Mode 1152)
The printer’s PCL mode supports CCITT G3/G4 type graphic data compression.
This format is popular in optical document storage area as this compression is effective to store black and white type pictures.
Compression mode for CCITT G3/G4 is 1152 and the command becomes
ESC * b 1152 M.
As G3/G4 format does not have picture size/resolution information, the printer requires a header at the beginning of the picture data. The header size is 94 byte. Both the header and the picture data are transferred by one transfer graphics data command (ESC * b ### W). Normal PCL transfer graphics data command has a limitation of the data size and ### should not exceed 32767. Unlike other mode, mode 1152 is special and this mode does not have 32767 byte size limitation.
Print model is not applied to this type of raster graphics.
The mode 1152 graphic data consists of the following data structure. The picture data follows the header.
Header
CCITT G3/G4
Picture Data
94 bytes
File length
Picture = #### data length
of ESC*b####W
Header format is described on the next page.
You have to specify mode 1152 by sending ESC *b1152M command for each graphic data transfer.
About CCITT G3/G4 data format, please refer to CCITT (THE
INTERNATIONAL TELEGRAPH AND TELEPHONE
CONSULTATIVE COMMITTEE) BLUE BOOK Volume VII.
Appendix–49
USER’S GUIDE
60-61
62-63
64-65
66-67
68-69
70-71
72-73
74-75
76-77
78-79
Mode 1152 graphic data header data structure
Position
0-1
2-3
4-7
8-11
12-13
14-15
16-19
20-21
22-55
56-59
80-81
82-83
84-85
86-87
88-89
90-91
92-93
Data
6E 6E
0A 00
5E 00 00 00 Picture data start offset from header top
File Length
01 00
01 00
4A 00 00 00 reserved compression 02 00: Fax MH format
00....00
Description
‘nn’ This is header ID.
reserved (Header Version)
File length including 94 byte header. If file length is 65,536
byte, these 4 bytes become “00 00 01 00”.
reserved
reserved
03 00: Fax MR format
04 00: Fax G4 format
All zero
Picture Data Length
If picture data length is 65,442 (65,536 - 94) byte, these
4 bytes become “A2 FF 00 00”.
01 00
01 00
bit/pixel
bit/pixel
Pixels/line If picture dot width = 2400, these 2 bytes become “60 09”.
Pixels/line Same as 64-65
Lines/picture If picture line count = 3100, these 2 bytes become “1C 0C”.
Lines/picture Same as 70-71
00 00 reserved
Photo metrics 00 00: data 0 = white 01 00: data 0 = black
02 00 reserved (Endian format)
Bit Fill Order 01 00: filled from MSB
02 00: filled from LSB
01 00
00 00
01 00
reserved
reserved (min. pixel value)
reserved (max pixel value) horizontal resolution (200,300,400,600)
C8 00 00 00 : 200 dpi
2C 01 00 00 : 300 dpi
90 01 00 00 : 400 dpi
58 02 00 00 : 600 dpi
400 and 600 dpi are available when printer
operates in 600 dpi.
vertical resolution (200,300,400,600)
C8 00 00 00 : 200 dpi
02 00
00 00
2C 01 00 00 : 300 dpi
90 01 00 00 : 400 dpi
58 02 00 00 : 600 dpi
The printer accepts different values for vertical and
horizontal resolutions.
400/600 dpi are available when printer operates in 600 dpi.
reserved (resolution unit = inch)
reserved (error code)
Appendix–50
APPENDICES
■ TIFF Format (Raster Graphic Mode 1024) & Advanced Photoscale
Technology
The printer’s PCL mode supports TIFF Version 5.0 file format as a format to transfer raster graphics data.
Mode set command for TIFF file format is ESC *b1024M.
One transfer graphics data command (ESC*b###W) should contain whole
TIFF file.
In mode 1024, transfer graphics data command byte count does not have a limitation of 32,767 byte.
The printer supports both ‘MM’ (big endian) format and ‘II’ (little endian) format.
Print model is not applied to this type of data transfer.
The printer has some limitations on the TIFF file format.
1. Tags position has to be prior to the picture (strip) data.
2. Compression tag --- Tag ID:259
The printer supports 1, 2, 3, 4 and 32773.
1: no compression (Bits/Sample=1,4,8)
2: CCITT G3 MH (Bits/Sample=1)
3: CCITT G3 MR (Bits/Sample=1)
4: CCITT G4 (Bits/Sample=1)
32773: Pack Bit (Bits/Sample=1)
3. Sample/pixel --- Tag ID:277
This value should be 1. This means the printer accepts only monochrome TIFF file.
4. Bits/Sample --- Tag ID:258
The printer supports 1, 4 and 8.
If you specify 4 or 8 and the printer resolution is 600 dpi, the printer prints that page utilizing APT.
5. Horizontal resolution (Tag ID=282) and Vertical resolution (Tag
ID=283)
Compression type Bits/Sample Available Resolution
No Compression 4, 8 From 1 dpi to 300 dpi
No Compression
Pack Bit
1
CCITT G3 & G4 1
Printer’s Resolution
(300 or 600 dpi)
200,300,400,600 dpi
400 & 600 dpi are only when printer operates in
600 dpi.
APT
ON
OFF
OFF
We recommend 150 dpi or less resolution for APT to reduce data size.
Appendix–51
USER’S GUIDE
Horizontal 1200-dpi Image Format Mode(Raster Graphic Mode
1027)
The printer supports 1200 dpi printing for special image formats in 1200 dpi mode.
We recommend that the installed printer memory is 10 Mbytes or more for
1200 dpi printing.
To set 1200 dpi mode,
1. Set 1200 dpi printing mode by using the following PJL command:
@PJL SET RAS1200MODE = ON
2. Choose PCL mode with the following PJL command:
@PJL ENTER LANGUAGE = PCL
(If you select a mode other than PCL mode, 1200 dpi printing mode cannot be selected.)
The PCL Mode set command for 1200 dpi Image Format is ESC *b1027M.
The transfer raster data command (ESC*b###W) then transfers horizontal
1200 dpi data.
<1200 dpi Graphic Data Compression Format>
This compression format consists of blocks of data 64 dots down the page starting from the leading edge of the paper.
Ex.) If the graphic data extends over three bands as shown in the following diagram, it transfers the data as three blocks of data:
ESC*b##W <Block 1> <Block 2> <Block 3>
0
64
128
192
256
320
Block 1
Block 2
Block 3
Band 1
Band 2
Band 3
Band 4
Band 5
In mode 1027, the transfer graphic data command byte count does not have a limitation of 32,767 bytes.
Appendix–52
APPENDICES
The block data is composed as follows:
Position Data
0 - 1 Block length
2 - 3
Description n - 2
Horizontal position dots from the left of the page
4 - 5
6
7 - 8
Vertical position
Height dots
Width words dots from the leading edge of the page number of image vertical dots number of image horizontal 16 bit
9 - (n - 1) Compression data words compression image data
Ex.) Data is at horizontal position = 256, vertical position = 64, height = 32 dots, width = 100 x 16 bit words (1600 dots), and compression data is 800 bytes;
ESC*b809W 03h 27h 01h 00h 00h 40h 20h 00h 64h [Data800Byte]
_
_
_
|
_
| a b c d e f
0
64
128
(256, 64)
1600
32
Band 1
Band 2 a: Block length(807) b: Horizontal position(256) c: Vertical position(64) d: Height dots(32) e: Width words(100) f: Compression image data
<Compressed Image Data>
Data compression compresses the original image data word by word (16 bits).
The compressed data consists of both horizontal compression which uses
16 bit, 8 bit and 4 bit repeating patterns within 1 word or 2 words of data, and vertical compression which indicates to repeat the same data as in the previous line with 1 word of data.
y Non-compressed data
When the most significant bit in the first 2 bytes is 0, the printer goes into non-compression mode. The following 11 bits then indicate the number of words of data, and the least significant 4 bits are not used. After that, the image data follows word by word.
15 14
0
4 3 0 not used data word count (11 bits) data 1 (16 bits)
: data n (16 bits)
Appendix–53
USER’S GUIDE y 16 bit repeating compressed data
When the most significant 3 bits in the first 2 bytes are in the order 1, 0, 0, the remaining 13 bits indicate the number of times to repeat 16 bit data. The following 2 bytes should be the 16 bit data to repeat.
15 14 13 12
1 0 0 number of repeats(13 bits) data to repeat(16 bits)
0 y 8 bit repeating compressed data
When the most significant 3 bits in the first 2 bytes are in the order 1, 1, 0, the following 5 bits indicate the number of times to repeat 16 bits (two by 8 bits) data. The remaining 8 bits should be the 8 bit data to repeat.
15 14 13 12
1 1 0 number of repeats
(5 bits)
8 7 data to repeat(8 bits)
0 y 4 bit repeating compression data
When the most significant 3 bits in the first 2 bytes are in the order 1, 0, 1, the following 4 bits indicate 4 bit data to repeat. The remaining 9 bits indicate the number of times to repeat the 16 bit (4 by 4 bits) data.
15 14 13 12
1 0 1 data to repeat
(4 bits)
9 8 0 number or repeats(9 bits) y Vertical repeating compressed data
When the most significant 3 bits in the first 2 bytes are in the order 1, 1, 1, the remaining 13 bits indicate the same data words as in the previous line.
15 14 13 12 0
1 1 1 the same data words as in the previous line (13 bits)
The printer can not support the APT and HRC function in the 1200 dpi printing mode.
Appendix–54
APPENDICES
HP-GL/2 Command Sets
Command
Dual Context Extensions
ENTER PCL MODE
Mnemonic
ESC % # A
RESET
PRIMARY FONT
ESC E
FI
SECONDARY FONT FN
SCALABLE OR BITMAPPED FONTS S B
Palette Extensions
TRANSPARENCY MODE
SCREENED VECTORS
Vector Group
ARC ABSOLUTE
ARC RELATIVE
ABSOLUTE ARC THREE POINT
BEZIER ABSOLUTE
TR
SV
AA
AR
AT
B Z
BEZIER RELATIVE BR
ABSOLUTE
PLOT RELATIVE
PEN DOWN
PEN UP
RELATIVE ARC THREE POINT
POLYLINE ENCODED
Polygon Group
CIRCLE
FILL RECTANGLE ABSOLUTE
FILL RECTANGLE RELATIVE
EDGE RECTANGLE ABSOLUTE
EDGE RECTANGLE RELATIVE
FILL WEDGE
PA
PR
PD
PU
RT
PE
CI
RA
RR
EA
ER
WG
Parameters
0-Retain previous PCL cursor position
and palette
1-Use current HP-GL/2 pen position and
palette
None
Font_ID
Font_ID
0-Scalable fonts only
1-Bitmapped fonts allowed
0-Off (opaque)
1-On (transparent)
[screen_type [, shading [, index]]] x_center, y_center, sweep_angle
[, chord_angle]; x_increment, y_increment, sweep_angle
[, chord_angle]; x_inter, y_inter, x_end, y_end
[,chord_angle];
x1_control_pt, y1_control_pt x2_control_pt, y2_control_pt x3_control_pt, y3_control_pt
[, params … [, parms ]].
x1_control_pt_increments, y1_control_pt_increments, x2_control_pt_increments, y2_control_pt_increments, x3_control_pt_increments, y3_control_pt_increments
[, params … [, parms ]]; PLOT
[x, y … [, x, y]];
[x, y … [, x, y]];
[x, y … [, x, y]];
[x, y … [, x, y]]; x_incr_inter, y_incr_inter, x_incr_end, y_incr-end [, chord_angle];
[flag [val]|coord_pair …
[flag[val]|coord_pair ]]; radius [, chord_angle]; x_coordinate, y_coordinate; x_increment, y_increment; x_coordinate, y_coordinate; x_increment, y_increment; radius, start_angle, sweep_angle
[, chord_angle];
Appendix–55
USER’S GUIDE
Command
EDGE WEDGE
POLYGON MODE
FILL POLYGON
EDGE POLYGON
Character Group
SELECT STANDARD FONT
SELECT ALTERNATE FONT
ABSOLUTE DIRECTION
RELATIVE DIRECTION
ABSOLUTE CHARACTER SIZE
RELATIVE CHARACTER SIZE
CHARACTER SLANT
EXTRA SPACE
STANDARD FONT DEFINITION
ALTERNATE FONT DEFINITION
CHARACTER FILL MODE
LABEL ORIGIN
LABEL
DEFINE LABEL TERMINATOR
CHARACTER PLOT
TRANSPARENT DATA
DEFINE VARIABLE TEXT PATH
Line and Fill Attributes Group
LINE TYPE
LINE ATTRIBUTES
PEN WIDTH
PEN WIDTH UNIT SELECTION
SELECT PEN
SYMBOL MODE
FILL TYPE
ANCHOR CORNER
RASTER FILL DEFINITION
USER DEFINED LINE TYPE
Configuration and Status Group
COMMENT
SCALE
INPUT WINDOW
INPUT P1 AND P2
INPUT RELATIVE P1 AND P2
DEFAULT VALUES
INITIALIZE
ROTATE COORDINATE SYSTEM
IW
IP
IR
DF
IN
RO
LT
LA
PW
WU
S P
SM
FT
AC
RF
UL
CO
S C
S L
E S
S D
AD
C F
LO
SS
SA
DI
DR
SI
S R
L B
D T
C P
T D
DV
Mnemonic Parameters
EW radius, start_angle, sweep_angle
[, chord_angle]; polygon_definition; PM
FP 0 Odd/Even fill
EP 1 non-zero winding fill
[run, rise];
[run, rise];
[width, height];
[width, height];
[tangent_of_angle];
[width [, height]]
[kind, value … [, kind, value]];
[kind, value … [, kind, value]];
[fill_mode [, edge_pen]];
[position];
[char … [char]] l bterm
[l bterm [, mode]];
[spaces, lines];
[mode];
[path [, line]];
[line_type [, pattern_length [, mode]]];
[kind, value … [, kind, value]];
[width [, pen]];
[type];
[pen];
[char];
[fill_type [, option 1 [, option 2]]];
[x_coordinate, y_coordinate];
[index, width, height, pen_nbr [, … pen_nbr]];
[index [, gap 1 … gap 20]];
[x 1, x 2, y 1, y 2 [, type [, left, bottom]]]; or
[x 1, x factor, y 1, y factor, 2];
[x L L, y L L, x U R, y U R];
[p 1 x, p 1 y [, p 2 x, p 2 y]];
[p 1 x, p 1 y [, p 2 x, p 2 y]];
[angle];
Appendix–56
APPENDICES
<WS>
<PC>
Printer Job Language Commands Syntax
Command
Syntax Rules
[ ]
< >
Special Characters and Items
<HT>
<LF>
<CR>
<SP>
<ESC>
<FF>
Function and Syntax
Brackets indicate optional parameters.
Indicates special characters and items
Horizontal Tab (element of white space)
Line Feed (PJL command terminator) 10
Carriage Return (optional parameter) 13
Space (element of white space)
Escape (used only for UEL/SPJL)
Form Feed
DEC.
HEX.
09
0A
09
0D
32
27
12
20
1B
0C
(terminator for multiple line reply)
White Space<SP> or <HT> or combination of <SP> and <HT>
Printable Characters (character code 33 through 126, and
161 through 254)
Beginning with <PC>, and combination of <PC> and <WS> <Words>
Printer Job Language Commands Syntax
COMMENT
DEFAULT
DINQUIRE
Reply
ECHO
Reply
ENTER
EOJ
INFO
Reply
INITIALIZE
INQUIRE
Reply
JOB
OPMSG
RDYMSG
RESET
SET
STMSG
Reply
Exit Current Emulation/Start PJL
(UEL/SPJL)
USTATUS
Reply
USTATUSOFF
(No Operation)
@PJL COMMENT <Words> [<CR>] <LF>
@PJL DEFAULT [LPARM: emulation] variable = value
[<CR>] <LF>
@PJL DINQUIRE [LPARM: emulation] variable [<CR>] <LF>
@PJL DINQUIRE [LPARM: emulation] variable <CR> <LF> value <CR> <LF> <FF>
@PJL ECHO [<Words>] [<CR>] <LF>
@PJL ECHO [<Words>] <CR> <LF> <FF>
@PJL ENTER LANGUAGE = emulation [<CR>] <LF>
@PJL EOJ [NAME = job name] [<CR>] <LF>
@PJL INFO read only variable [<CR>] <LF>
@PJL INFO read only variable <CR> <LF>
[1 or more lines of printable characters or <WS> followed by <CR> <LF>] <FF>
@PJL INITIALIZE [<CR>] <LF>
@PJL INQUIRE [LPARM: emulation] variable [<CR>] <LF>
@PJL INQUIRE [LPARM: emulation] variable <CR> <LF> value <CR> <LF> <FF>
@PJL JOB [NAME = “job name”] [START = first page]
[END = last page] [<CR>] <LF>
@PJL OPMSG DISPLAY = “message” [<CR>] <LF>
@PJL RDYMSG DISPLAY = “message” [<CR>] <LF>
@PJL RESET [<CR>] <LF>
@PJL SET [LPARM: emulation] variable = value [<CR>] <LF>
@PJL STMSG DISPLAY = “message” [<CR>] <LF>
@PJL STMSG DISPLAY = “message” <CR> <LF> key <CR> <LF> <FF>
<ESC> % - 12345X
@PJL USTATUS variable = value [<CR>] <LF>
@PJL USTATUS variable <CR> <LF>
[1 or more lines of printable characters or <WS> followed by <CR> <LF>] <FF>
@PJL USTATUSOFF [<CR>] <LF>
@PJL [<CR>] <LF>
Appendix–57
USER’S GUIDE
EPSON FX-850 Mode
Command name Function Sequence Decimal Hexadecimal
Null
Bell
Space
Backspace
Line Feed
Form Feed
Carriage Return
Home Positioning
Ignored
Ignored
NUL
BEL
Moves the cursor one position to the right SP
Moves the cursor one position to the left BS
Moves down one line LF
Ejects a page (if data has been printed on it) FF
Moves cursor to left margin
Moves the cursor to the home position
CR
ESC <
Select Printer
Deselect Printer
Set MSB=0
Set MSB=1
Ignored
Ignored
Sets most significant bit to zero
Sets most significant bit to one
DC1
DC3
ESC=
ESC >
Cancel MSB Settings Cancels MSB settings
Expand Printable
Code Area
Allows characters 128 (d) through 159 (d) and 255 (d) to be printed
ESC #
ESC 6
0
7
32
8
10
12
13
27 60
17
19
27 61
27 62
27 35
27 54
Cancel Expanded Cancels printing of characters 128 (d)
Printable Code Area through 159 (d) and 255 (d)
Expand Printable
Code Area
Allows characters 0 (d) through 31 (d) and
128 (d) through 159 (d) to be printed
ESC 7
ESC I 1
ESC I 0 Cancel Expand Cancels printing of characters 0 (d)
Printable Code Area through 31 (d) and 129 (d) through 159 (d)
Change Emulation
(original)
Changes the emulation of the printer. All data received so far will be printed and
ESC CR m
27 55
27 73 49
27 73 48
27 13 m
1B 37
1B 49 31
1B 49 30
1B 0D m
User Reset the page ejected. m is an ASCII code.
m=AB - BR-Script 2 Batch Mode m=AI - BR-Script 2 Interactive Mode m=E - Reset Epson Mode m=GL - HP-GL Mode m=H - HP LaserJet 4+ Mode m=I - IBM Proprinter Mode
Restore to User Settings
(n=0 to 2)
ESC CR ! n R
27 13 33 n 82
ESC EM n 27 25 n
1B 0D 21 n 52
1B 19 n Paper Input Control Controls the paper input n=0 - Initialize Feeder Mode n=1 - Feed From MP Tray n=2 - Feed From Upper Cassette (Tray 1) n=3 - Feed From Lower Cassette (Tray 2) n=R - Eject Paper
Duplex/Simplex Print Sets simplex or duplex print mode
(available when duplex n=0 - Simplex unit is installed)
(original) n=1 - Duplex & long edge binding n=2 - Duplex & short edge binding
Page Side Selection Sets page side selection
(available when duplex n=0 - Next side unit is installed)
(original)
Initialize Printer
Set Form Length
Set Left Margin n=1 - Front side n=2 - Back side
Initializes printer and clears print buffer
(prints data)
Sets page length in current line spacing
(1
≤ n
≤
127)
Sets left margin n characters from home position (range depends on type size and paper size)
ESC CR ! n D
ESC CR ! n S
ESC @
ESC C n
ESC l n
27 13 33 n 68
27 13 33 n 83
27 64
27 67 n
27 108 n
1B 0D 21 n 44
1B 0D 21 n 53
1B 40
1B 43 n
1B 6C n
00
07
20
08
0A
0C
0D
1B 3C
11
13
1B 3D
1B 3E
1B 23
1B 36
Appendix–58
APPENDICES
Command name Function Sequence Decimal Hexadecimal
Set Right Margin
Set Skip-over
Perforation
Cancel Skip-over
Perforation
Sets right margin n columns from the left margin (range depends on type size and paper size)
Sets bottom margin at the n-th line, counting from the bottom
Cancels the setting of the bottom margin
ESC Q n
ESC N n
ESC O
Set 1/6” Line Spacing Line spacing is set to 1/6 inch
Set 1/8” Line Spacing Line spacing is set to 1/8 inch
ESC 2
ESC 0
Set 7/72” Line Spacing Line spacing is set to 7/72 inch
Set n/72” Line Spacing Line spacing is set to n/72 inch (0
≤ n
≤
85)
Set n/216” Line
ESC 1
ESC A n
Line spacing is set to n/216 inch (0
≤ n
≤
255) ESC 3 n
Spacing
Perform n/216” Advances paper (moves cursor) by n/216 ESC J n
27 81 n
27 78 n
27 79
27 50
27 48
27 49
27 65 n
27 51 n
1B 51 n
1B 4E n
1B 4F
1B 32
1B 30
1B 31
1B 41 n
1B 33 n
27 74 n 1B 4A n
Paper Feed
Perform n/216” inch
Reverse feeds paper (moves cursor) by
Reverse Paper Feed n/216 inch
Set Horizontal Tab
Stops
Horizontal Tab
Set Vertical Tab
Stops
Vertical Tab
Select VFU
Set Vertical Tab
Stops (VFU
Sets up to 32 horizontal tab stops
(terminated by a NUL)
Moves to next horizontal tab
Sets up to 16 vertical tab stops
(terminated by a NUL)
Moves to next vertical tab stop
ESC j n 27 106 n 1B 6A n
ESC D n1 … 27 68 n1 … 1B 44 n1 … nk NUL nk 0 nk 00
HT 9 09
ESC b n1 … nk NUL
VT
27 98 n1 … 1B 62 n1 … nk 0
11 nk 00
0B
Selects Vertical Format Unit ESC / n 27 47 n 1B 2F n
Sets up to 16 vertical tab stops in selected ESC B n1 … 27 66 n1 … 1B 42 n1 …
Vertical Format Unit (selected by nk NUL nk 0 nk 00
Channel)
Set Absolute Print
Position
Set Relative Print
Position
Set Pica Pitch
Set Elite Pitch
Set Proportional
Spacing Mode previous command). Terminated by NUL
Moves (n1 + n2 x 256)/60” from left margin
ESC $ n1 n2 27 36 n1 n2 1B 24 n1 n2
Moves (n1 + n2 x 256)/120” from current ESC \ n1 n2 27 92 n1 n2 1B 5C n1 n2 position
Selects 10 cpi printing ESC P 27 80 1B 50
Selects 12 cpi printing
Selects proportional spacing mode and fonts (BS disabled)
Disable Proportion- Disables proportional spacing mode al Spacing Mode
Set Condensed Mode Sets condensed printing
Cancel Condensed
Mode
Cancels condensed printing mode
ESC M
ESC p 1
ESC p 0
SI or ESC SI
DC2
27 77 1B 4D
27 112 49 1B 70 31
27 112 48 1B 70 30
15 or 27 15 0F or 1B 0F
18 12
Set Emphasized Selects boldface printing ESC E or
Mode ESC G
Cancel Emphasized ESC F cancels ESC E boldface and ESC H ESC F or
Mode cancels ESC G boldface ESC H
Set Enlarged
Character Mode
Selects enlarged characters for one line only
SO or
ESC SO or
ESC W 1
27 69 or 27 1B 45 or 1B
71
14 or
27 14 or
47
27 70 or 27 1B 46 or 1B
72 48
0E or
1B 0E or
27 87 49 1B 57 31
Cancel Enlarged
Character Mode
Cancels above settings (CAN cancels
SO only, and DC4 cancels SO and
ESC SO only)
DC4 or
CAN or
ESC W 0
20 or 24 or 14 or 18 or
27 87 48 1B 57 30
Appendix–59
USER’S GUIDE
Command name Function Sequence Decimal Hexadecimal
Set/Cancel Double-
High Mode
Sets (n = 1) or cancels (n = 0) double-high ESC w n mode
Set Italic Print Mode Selects italic printing
Cancel Italic Print
Mode
Cancels italic printing
ESC 4
ESC 5
ESC S n Set Super/Subscript Sets either superscript (n=0) or subscript
Print Mode
Cancel Super/
(n=1) printing
Cancels effect superscript or subscript
Subscript Print Mode printing
Set/Cancel Underline Sets (n=1) or cancels (n=0) underlined
Print Mode printing (including spaces)
Select Justification n=0: Left justify, n=1: Centering n=2: Right justify, n=3: Fully justify
Adds n/120” space to each character Set Intercharacter
Space
Select Print Mode Allows combinations of attributes to be added to following text
Selects either Epson (n=0) or IBM (n=1) Select Epson/IBM character set
Select International
Character Set character set
Selects character set
ESC T
ESC - n
ESC a n
ESC SP n
ESC ! n
ESC t n
ESC R n
Defines downloaded characters
27 119 n
27 52
27 53
27 83 n
27 84
27 45 n
27 97 n
27 32 n
27 33 n
27 116 n
27 82 n
1B 77 n
1B 34
1B 35
1B 53 n
1B 54
1B 2D n
1B 61 n
1B 20 n
1B 21 n
1B 74 n
1B 52 n
ESC & NUL 27 38 0 n m 1B 26 00 n n m a {data} a {data} m a {data}
ESC % n 27 37 n 1B 25 n
Define Download
Characters
Select Download
Character Mode
Copy ROM
Characters to
Download RAM
Select Bit Image
Mode
Set 9-dot Bit Image
Mode
Set Single-Density
Bit Image Mode
Set Double-Density
Bit Image Mode
Set Double-Speed
Double-Density Bit
Image Mode
Selects either downloaded (n=1) or internal (n=0) character set
Copies internal character data to download RAM area
Selects and prints bit image data
ESC : 0 0 0 27 58 48 48 1B 3A 30
48 30 30
ESC * m n1 27 42 m n1 1B 2A m n1 n2 {data} n2 {data} n2 {data}
Selects and prints “9-dot” bit image data
ESC ^ a n1 n2 {data}
27 94 a n1 n2 {data}
1B 5E a n1 n2 {data}
Selects and prints single-density bit image ESC K n1 n2 27 75 n1 n2 1B 4B n1 n2 data
Selects and prints double-density bit image data
{data}
ESC L n1 n2
{data}
{data}
27 76 n1 n2 1B 4C n1 n2
{data}
{data}
{data}
Selects and prints “double-speed” doubleESC Y n1 n2 27 89 n1 n2 1B 59 n1 n2 density bit image data {data} {data} {data}
Set Quadruple-
Density Bit Image
Mode
Reassign Graphics
Mode
Set Scalable Font
Ratio (original)
Execute Card Data
(original)
Selects and prints quadruple-density bit image data
Changes bit image density
Selects horizontal ratio
(n=0.25 to 3 step 0.01)
Selects vertical ratio
(n=0.25 to 3 step 0.01)
Execute saved card data
ESC Z n1 n2 27 90 n1 n2 1B 5A n1 n2
{data} {data} {data}
ESC ? n m
ESC CR ! n H
ESC CR !
n V
ESC CR ! n E
27 63 n m
27 13 33 n 72
27 13 33 n 69
1B 3F n m
1B 0D 21 n 48
27 13 33 1B 0D 21 n 86 n 56
1B 0D 21 n 45
Appendix–60
APPENDICES
IBM Proprinter XL Mode
Command name Function Sequence Decimal Hexadecimal
Null
Bell
Space
Backspace
Line Feed
Form Feed
Carriage Return
Set/Cancel Auto
Line Feed Mode
Select Printer
Deselect Printer
Deselect Printer
Set Epson
Emulation Mode
Change Emulation
(original)
Ignored
Ignored
NUL
BEL
Moves the cursor one character to the right SP
Moves the cursor one character to the left BS
Moves the cursor to the next line LF
Prints the data in the buffer and ejects the FF page (if the buffer is empty, this command is ignored)
Moves the cursor to the left margin on the CR current line. If Auto LF has been set from the front panel or by software (ESC 5 1), the cursor will move down one line
Sets (n=1) or cancels (n=0) auto line feed
Overrides the front panel setting
Selects printer following deselection
ESC 5 n
DC1
(ESC Q)
Ignored
Deselects printer, which will not accept data until a DC1 is received
Selects Epson FX-850 emulation mode.
All data in the buffer is printed and the page ejected
Changes the emulation of the printer. All data received so far will be printed and the page ejected. m is an ASCII code.
m=AB - BR-Script 2 Batch Mode m=AI - BR-Script 2 Interactive Mode m=E - Epson Mode m=GL - HP-GL Mode
DC3
0
7
32
8
10
12
00
07
20
08
0A
0C
13
ESC Q 2 2 27 81 50 50 1B 51 32 32
ESC Q 3
ESC @
ESC CR m
13
27 53 n
17
19
27 51 51
27 64
27 13 m
0D
1B 35 n
11
1B 51 33
1B 40
1B 0D m m=H - HP LaserJet 4+ Mode m=I - Reset IBM Proprinter Mode
Restore to User Settings User Reset
(n=0 to 2)
Paper Input Control Controls the paper input n=0 - Feed From Manual Feed Slot n=1 - Feed From MP Tray n=2 - Feed From Upper Cassette (Tray 1) n=3 - Feed From Lower Cassette (Tray 2)
ESC CR ! n R
27 13 33 n 82
ESC EM n 27 25 n
1B 0D 21 n 52
1B 19 n n=R - Eject Paper
Duplex/Simplex Print Sets simplex or duplex print mode
(available when duplex n=0 - Simplex unit is installed) n=1 - Duplex & long edge binding
(original) n=2 - Duplex & short edge binding
Page Side Selection Sets page side selection
(available when duplex n=0 - Next side unit is installed) n=1 - Front side
(original)
Set Form Length
Set Right and Left
Margins
Set Skip-over
Perforation
ESC CR ! n D
ESC CR ! n S
27 13 33 n 68
27 13 33 n 83
1B 0D 21 n 44
1B 0D 21 n 53 n=2 - Back side
Sets form length to n lines at current spacing (1
≤ n
≤
255)
Sets from length to n inches at current spacing (0
≤ n
≤
15)
ESC C n
ESC C 0 n
27 67 n
27 67 48 n
1B 43 n
1B 43 30 n n1 is used to set the left margin, and n2 the right margin (1
≤ n1
≤ n2
≤
255)
ESC X n1 n2 27 88 n1 n2 1B 58 n1 n2
Sets bottom margin at n-th line, counting ESC N n from the bottom (1
≤ n
≤
255)
27 78 n 1B 4E n
Appendix–61
USER’S GUIDE
Command name Function Sequence Decimal Hexadecimal
Cancel Skip-over
Perforation
Set 1/8” Line
Spacing Mode
Set 7/72” Line
Spacing Mode
Save n/72” Line
Spacing Mode
Activate n/72”
Line Spacing
Mode set by ESC A
Cancels the bottom margin setting
Sets line spacing to 1/8 inch
Sets line spacing to 7/72 inch
Sets line spacing mode to n/72 inch
(1
≤ n
≤
85). Activated by ESC 2 command
ESC O
ESC 0
ESC 1
ESC A n
Activates line spacing mode set by ESC A ESC 2
27 79
27 48
27 49
27 65 n
27 50
1B 4F
1B 30
1B 31
1B 41 n
1B 32
Set n/216” Line
Spacing
Execute n/216”
Line Spacing
Set Horizontal Tab
Stops
Horizontal Tab
Set Vertical Tab
Stops
Vertical Tab
Restore to Default
Tab Settings
Set Pica Pitch
Set Elite Pitch
Set/Cancel
Proportional
Spacing Mode
Sets line spacing to n/216 inch (1
≤
Advances the cursor by n/216 inch n
≤
255)
Sets up to 28 horizontal tab stops
(terminated by NUL)
Advances to next horizontal tab (if none have been defined, default tab stops are set every 8 columns)
Sets up to 64 vertical tab stops
(terminated by NUL)
Advances to next vertical tab stops
(or LF if none have been defined)
Clears any vertical tab stops, and sets default horizontal tab stops every 8 columns
Selects 10 cpi printing
Selects 12 cpi printing
Sets (n=1) or cancels (n=0) proportionallyESC P n spaced printing
Set Condensed
Character Mode
Set Emphasized
Selects condensed characters (canceled by DC2)
Selects emphasized printing (canceled
Character Mode by ESC F)
Cancel Emphasized Cancels emphasized printing
Character Mode
ESC 3 n
ESC J n
27 51 n
27 74 n
1B 33 n
1B 4A n
ESC D n1 … 27 68 n1 … 1B 44 n1 … nk NUL
HT nk NUL
VT
ESC R
DC2
ESC :
SI
ESC E
ESC F nk NUL
9 nk NUL
09
ESC B n1 … 27 66 n1 … 1B 42 n1 … nk NUL
11
27 82
18
27 58
27 80 n
15
27 69
27 70 nk NUL
0B
1B 52
12
1B 3A
1B 50 n
0F
1B 45
1B 46
SO 14 0E Set Enlarged
Character Mode
Cancel Enlarged
Character Mode
Set/Cancel
Enlarged
Selects enlarged characters for one line only
Cancels one-line enlarged character printing
Sets (n=1) or cancels (n=0) enlarged character printing. When n=0, SO
Character Mode enlarged printing will also be canceled
Set Super/Subscript Sets superscript (n=0) or subscript (n=1)
Print Mode
Cancel
Super/Subscript printing
Cancels superscript or subscript printing
Print Mode
DC4 or
CAN
ESC W n
ESC S n
ESC T
20 or 24
27 87 n
27 83 n
27 84
14 or 18
1B 57 n
1B 53 n
1B 54
Appendix–62
APPENDICES
Command name
Set/Cancel
Underline Print
Mode
Set/Cancel
Overline Print
Mode
Select Double-
High/Double-
Width Mode
Select Character
Set II
Select Character
Set I
Select Characters from All Character
Table
Select a Character from All Character
Table
Define 8-dot
Download
Characters
Select Download
Font
Set Single-Density
Bit Image Mode
Set Double-Density
Bit Image Mode
Set Double-Speed
Double-Density Bit
Image Mode
Set Quadruple-
Density Bit Image
Mode
Set Scalable Font
Ratio (original)
Execute Card Data
(original)
Function
When n=1, subsequent characters
(including spaces, but excluding horizontal tabs) are underlined.
When n=0, this effect is canceled
When n=1, subsequent characters
(including spaces, but excluding horizontal tabs) are overlined.
When n=0, this effect is canceled
Depending on the values of m3 and m4, double-height and/or double-width printing is enabled or disabled
Allows printing of the symbols in
Character Set II
Allows printing of the symbols in
Character Set I
Allows (n1 + (n2 x 256)) characters to be printed from the All Characters Table.
Control codes in the data are ignored
Prints one character (c) from the All
Character Table
Sequence
ESC - n
ESC _ n
ESC [ @ 4
0 0 0 m3 m4
ESC 6
ESC 7
ESC \ n1 n2
{data}
ESC ^ c
Decimal
27 45 n
27 95 n
0 0 0 m3 m4
27 54
27 55
Hexadecimal
1B 2D n
1B 5F n
27 91 64 4 1B 5B 40 04
00 00 00 m3 m4
1B 36
1B 37
27 92 n1 n2 1B 5C n1 n2
{data}
27 94 c
{data}
1B 5E c
Allows definition of user-defined characters
ESC = n1 n2 27 61 n1 n2 1B 3D n1 n2 sp m a1 a2 32 m a1 a2 20 m a1 a2
{data}
ESC I n
{data}
27 73 n
{data}
1B 49 n Selects font and print quality (n=0 or 2 internal fonts, n=4 or 6 - downloaded fonts)
Selects and prints single-density bit-image ESC K n1 data n2 {data}
Selects and prints double-density bit image data
ESC L n1 n2 {data}
Selects and prints “double speed” doubleESC Y n1 density bit image data n2 {data}
27 75 n1 n2 1B 4B n1 n2
{data} {data}
27 76 n1 n2 1B 4C n1 n2
{data} {data}
27 89 n1 n2 1B 59 n1 n2
{data} {data}
Selects and prints quadruple-density bit image data
ESC Z n1 n2 {data}
27 90 n1 n2 1B 5A n1 n2
{data} {data}
Selects horizontal ratio
(n=0.25 to 3 step 0.01)
Selects vertical ratio
(n-0.25 to 3 step 0.01)
Execute saved card data
ESC CR ! n H
ESC CR !
n V
ESC CR ! n E
27 13 33 1B 0D 21 n 72 n 48
27 13 33 1B 0D 21 n 86 n 56
27 13 33 1B 0D 21 n 69 n 45
Appendix–63
USER’S GUIDE
HP-GL Mode
Command Mnemonic
Vector Group
ARC ABSOLUTE
ARC RELATIVE
PLOT ABSOLUTE
PLOT RELATIVE
PEN DOWN
PEN UP
Polygon Group
CIRCLE CI
SHADE RECTANGLE ABSOLUTE RA
SHADE RECTANGLE RELATIVE RR
EDGE RECTANGLE ABSOLUTE EA
EDGE RECTANGLE RELATIVE ER
SHADE WEDGE
EDGE WEDGE
WG
EW
AA
AR
PA
PR
PD
PU
Character Group
SELECT STANDARD SET
SELECT ALTERNATE SET
ABSOLUTE DIRECTION
RELATIVE DIRECTION
ABSOLUTE CHARACTER SIZE
RELATIVE CHARACTER SIZE
CHARACTER SLANT
STANDARD SET DEFINITION
ALTERNATE SET DEFINITION
LABEL
DEFINE LABEL TERMINATOR
CHARACTER PLOT
USER DEFINED CHARACTER
S R
S L
CS
CA
L B
DT
CP
UC
S S
SA
DI
DR
SI
Line and Fill Attributes Group
LINE TYPE
PEN WIDTH
SELECT PEN
SYMBOL MODE
FILL TYPE
TICK LENGTH
X TICK
Y TICK
PEN THICKNESS
Configuration and Status Group
SCALE
INPUT WINDOW
INPUT P1 AND P2
S C
IW
IP
DEFAULT VALUES
INITIALIZE
DF
IN
ROTATE COORDINATE SYSTEM RO
PAGE OUTPUT P G
LT
PW
S P
SM
FT
T L
XT
YT
P T
Parameters x_center, y_center, sweep_angle [, chord_angle]; x_increment, y_increment, sweep_angle [, chord_angle];
[x, y … [, x, y]];
[x, y … [, x, y]];
[x, y … [, x, y]];
[x, y … [, x, y]]; radius [, chord_angle]; x_coordinate, y_coordinate; x_increment, y_increment; x_coordinate, y_coordinate; x_increment, y_increment; radius, start_angle, sweep_angle [, chord_angle]; radius, start_angle, sweep_angle [, chord_angle];
[run, rise];
[run, rise];
[width, height];
[width, height];
[tangent_of_angle];
[Designate_standard_character_set];
[Designate_alternate_character_set];
[char … [char]] l bterm
[l bterm];
[spaces, lines];
[[pen_control], x_increment, y_increment [, ... ]
[, pen_control][, ... ]];
[line_type [, pattern_length]];
[width [, pen]];
[pen];
[char];
[fill_type [, option 1 [, option 2]]];
[tick_p [, tick_n]];
[fill_line_interval];
[x 1, x 2, y 1, y 2];
[x L L, y L L, x U R, y U R];
[p 1 x, p 1 y [, p 2 x, p 2 y]];
;
;
[angle];
[copy_number];
Appendix–64
Function Command
Go to Other Emulations
BR-Script 2 Batch Mode
BR-Script 2 Interactive Mode
HP LaserJet III
IBM Proprinter XL
EPSON FX-850
High Resolution Control (HRC)
Set HRC Off
Set HRC to Light Level
Set HRC to Medium Level
Set HRC to Dark Level
User Reset
Restore to User Settings
ESC CR AB
ESC CR AI
ESC CR H
ESC CR I
ESC CR E
ESC CR R O
ESC CR R L
ESC CR R M
ESC CR R D
27 13 65 66
27 13 65 73
27 13 72
27 13 73
27 13 69
Decimal
27 13 82 79
27 13 82 76
27 13 82 77
27 13 82 68
ESC CR ! n R n = 0 to 2
27 13 33 n 82
Factory Reset
Restore to Factory Settings ESC CR F D 27 13 70 68
Duplex/Simplex Print (available when duplex unit is installed) (original)
Set Simplex ESC CR ! 0 D 27 13 33 48 68
Set Duplex & long edge binding ESC CR ! 1 D 27 13 33 49 68
Set Duplex & short edge binding ESC CR ! 2 D 27 13 33 50 68
Page Side Selection (available when duplex unit is installed) (original)
Set next side ESC CR ! 0 S 27 13 33 48 83
Set front side
Set back side
ESC CR ! 1 S
ESC CR ! 2 S
27 13 33 49 83
27 13 33 50 83
Scalable Font Ratio (original)
Set horizontal ratio
(n=0.25 to 3 step 0.01)
Set vertical ratio
(n=0.25 to 3 step 0.01)
Execute Card Data (original)
Execute saved card data
ESC CR ! n H
ESC CR ! n V
ESC CR ! n E
27 13 33 n 72
27 13 33 n 86
27 13 33 n 69
Hexadecimal
1B 0D 41 42
1B 0D 41 49
1B 0D 48
1B 0D 49
1B 0D 45
1B 0D 52 4F
1B 0D 52 4C
1B 0D 52 4D
1B 0D 52 44
1B 0D 21 n 52
1B 0D 46 44
1B 0D 21 30 44
1B 0D 21 31 44
1B 0D 21 32 44
1B 0D 21 30 53
1B 0D 21 31 53
1B 0D 21 32 53
1B 0D 21 n 48
1B 0D 21 n 56
1B 0D 21 n 45
APPENDICES
Appendix–65
USER’S GUIDE
Bar Code Control
The printer can print bar codes in the HP LaserJet 4+, EPSON
FX-850, and IBM Proprinter XL emulation modes.
Print Bar Codes or Expanded Characters
Code
Dec
Hex
ESC i
27 105
1B 69
Format: ESC i n … n \
Creates bar codes or expanded characters according to the segment of parameters “n … n”. For further information about parameters, see the following “Definition of Parameters.” This command must end with the
“ \ ” code (5CH).
[Definition of Parameters]
This bar code command can have the following parameters in the parameter segment (n … n). Since parameters are effective within the single command syntax ESC i n … n \, they don’t take effect in the subsequent bar code commands. If certain parameters are not specified, they take the default settings. The last parameter must be the bar code data start (“b” or “B”) or the expanded character data start (“l” or “L”). Other parameters can be specified in any sequence. The prefix of each parameter can be a lower-case or upper-case character: for example, “t0” or “T0”, “s3” or “S3”, etc.
■ Bar Code Mode n = “t0” or “T0” n = “t1” or “T1” n = “t3” or “T3” n = “t4” or “T4” n = “t5” or “T5” n = “t6” or “T6” n = “t9” or “T9” n = “t12” or “T12” n = “t13” or “T13” n = “t14” or “T14” n = “t130” or “T130” n = “t131” or “T131” n = “t132” or “T132” n = “t133” or “T133” n = “t134” or “T134”
CODE 39 (default)
Interleaved 2 of 5
FIM (US-Post Net)
Post Net (US-Post Net)
EAN 8, EAN 13, or UPC A
UPC E
Codabar
Code 128 set A
Code 128 set B
Code 128 set C
ISBN (EAN)
ISBN (UPC-E)
EAN 128 set A
EAN 128 set B
EAN 128 set C
This parameter selects the bar code mode as above. When n is “t5” or
“T5”, the bar code mode (EAN 8, EAN 13, or UPC A) varies according to the number of characters in the data.
Appendix–66
APPENDICES
■ Bar Code, Expanded Character, Line Block Drawing & Box Drawing n = “s0” or “S0” n = “s1” or “S1” n = “s3” or “S3”
3 : 1 (default)
2 : 1
2.5 : 1
This parameter selects the bar code style as above. When the EAN 8,
EAN 13, UPC-A, Code 128 or EAN 128 bar code mode is selected, this bar code style parameter is ignored.
Expanded Character
“S” 0 = White
1 = Black
2 = Vertical stripes
3 = Horizontal stripes
4 = Cross hatch eg.
“S” n1 n2 n1 = Background fill pattern n2 = Foreground fill pattern
If “S” is followed by only one parameter, the parameter is a foreground fill pattern.
Line Block Drawing & Box Drawing
“S” 1 = Black
2 = Vertical stripes
3 = Horizontal stripes
4 = Cross hatch
■ Bar Code n = “mnnn” or “Mnnn” (nnn = 0 ~ 32767)
This parameter specifies the bar code width. The unit of "nnn" is %.
Appendix–67
USER’S GUIDE
■ Bar Code Human Readable Line On or Off n = “r0” or “R0” n = “r1” or “R1”
Human readable line OFF
Human readable line ON
Default: Human readable line ON
(1) “T5” or “t5”
(2) “T6” or “t6”
(3) “T130” or “t130”
(4) “T131” or “t131”
Default: Human readable line OFF
All others
This parameter specifies whether or not the printer prints the human readable line below the bar code. Human readable characters are always printed with OCR-B font of 10 pitch and all the current character style enhancements are masked. Note that the default setting is subject to the bar code mode selected by “t” or “T”.
■ Quiet Zone n = “onnn” or “Onnn” (nnn = 0 ~ 32767)
Quiet Zone is the space on both side of the bar codes. Its width can be specified using the units which are set by the “u” of “U” parameter. (For the description of “u” or “U” parameter, see the next section.) The default setting of Quiet Zone width is 1 inch.
■ Bar Code, Expanded Character Unit, Line Block Drawing & Box
Drawing n = “u0” or “U0” Millimeters (default) n = “u1” or “U1” 1/10” n = “u2” or “U2” 1/100” n = “u3” or “U3” 1/12” n = “u4” or “U4” 1/120” n = “u5” or “U5” 1/10 Millimeters n = “u6” or “U6” 1/300” n = “u7” or “U7” 1/720”
This parameter specifies the measurement units of X-axis offset, Y-axis offset, and bar code height.
Appendix–68
APPENDICES
■ Bar Code, Expanded Character, Line Block Drawing & Box Drawing
Offset in X-axis n = “xnnn” or “Xnnn”
This parameter specifies the offset from the left margin in the “u”- or
“U”-specified unit.
■ Bar Code & Expanded Character Offset in Y-axis n = “ynnn” or “Ynnn”
This parameter specifies the downward offset from the current print position in the “u”- or “U”-specified unit.
■ Bar Code, Expanded Character, Line Block Drawing & Box Drawing
Height n = “hnnn”, “Hnnn”, “dnnn”, or “Dnnn”
(1) EAN13, EAN8, UPC-A, ISBN (EAN13, EAN8, UPC-A),
ISBN (UPC-E): 22 mm
(2) UPC-E:
(3) Others:
18 mm
12 mm
Expanded characters ➞ 2.2 mm (default)
Line Block Drawing & Box Drawing ➞ 1 dot
This parameter specifies the height of bar codes or expanded characters as above. It can take the prefix “h”, “H”, “d”, or “D”. The height of bar codes is specified in the “u”- or “U”-specified unit. Note that the default setting of the bar code height (12 mm, 18 mm or 22 mm) is subject to the bar code mode selected by “t” or “T”.
■ Expanded Character Width, Line Block Drawing & Box Drawing n = “wnnn” or “Wnnn”
Expanded character ➞ 1.2 mm
Line Block Drawing & Box Drawing ➞ 1 dot
This parameter specifies the width of expanded characters as above.
Appendix–69
USER’S GUIDE
■ Expanded Character Rotation n = “a0” or “A1” n = “a1” or “A1” n = “a2” or “A2” n = “a3” or “A3”
■ Bar Code Data Start n = “b” or “B”
Upright (default)
Rotated 90 degrees
Upside down, rotated 180 degrees
Rotated 270 degrees
Data that follows “b” or “B” is read in as bar code data. Bar code data must end with the “ \ ” code (5CH), which also terminates this command. The acceptable bar code data is subject to the bar code mode selected by “t” or “T”.
• When CODE 39 is selected with the parameter “t0” or “T0”:
Forty three characters “0” to “9”, “A” to “Z”, “-”, “ . ”, “ (space)”, “$”,
“ / ”, “+”, and “%” can be accepted as bar code data. Other characters cause data error. The number of characters for bar codes is not limited.
The bar code data automatically starts and ends with an asterisk “ * ”
(start character and stop character). If the received data has an asterisk
“ * ” at its beginning or end, the asterisk is regarded as a start character or stop character.
• When Interleaved 2 of 5 is selected with the parameter “t1” or “T1”:
Ten numerical characters “0” to “9” can be accepted as bar code data.
Other characters cause data error. The number of characters for bar codes is not limited. Since this mode of bar codes require even characters, if the bar code data has odd characters, the zero character
“0” is automatically added to the end of the bar code data.
• When FIM (US-Post Net) is selected with the parameter “t3” or “T3”:
Characters “A” to “D” are valid and 1 digit of data can be printed.
Uppercase and lowercase alphabet characters can be accepted.
• When Post Net (US-Post Net) is selected with the parameter “t4” or
“T4”:
Characters “0” to “9” can be data and it must be terminated by a check digit. “?” can be used in place of the check digit.
Appendix–70
APPENDICES
• When EAN 8, EAN 13, or UPC A is selected with the parameter “t5” or
“T5”:
Ten numerical characters “0” to “9” can be accepted as bar code data.
The number of characters for bar codes is limited as follows.
EAN 8: Total 8 digits (7 digits + 1 check digit)
EAN 13: Total 13 digits (12 digits + 1 check digit)
UPC A: Total 12 digits (11 digits + 1 check digit)
A number of characters other than above causes data error and the bar code data is printed as normal print data. If the check digit is incorrect, the printer calculates the correct check digit automatically so that the correct bar code data will be printed. When EAN13 is selected, adding
“+” and a 2-or 5-digit number after the data can create an add-on code.
• When UPC-E is selected with the parameter “t6” or “T6”:
The numerical characters “0” to “9” can be accepted as bar code data.
(1) 8 digits Standard format. The first character must be “0” and the data must be terminated by
(2) 6 digits a check digit.
Total 8 digits = “0” + 6 digits + 1 check digit.
The first character and the last check digit are removed from the 8 digit data.
*1: For 8 digits, “?” can be used in place of a check digit.
*2: Adding “+” and 2- or 5-digit number after the data creates an add-on code for all 6 and 8 digit formats.
• When Codabar is selected with the parameter “t9” or “T9”:
Characters “0” to “9”, “-”, “ . ”, “$”, “/”, “+”, “ : ” can be printed.
Characters “A” to “D” can be printed as a start-stop code, which can be uppercase or lowercase. If there is no start-stop code, errors occur. A check digit cannot be added and using “?” causes errors.
• When Code 128 Set A, Set B, or Set C is selected with the parameter
“t12” or “T12,” “t13” or “T13,” or “t14” or “T14” respectively:
Code 128 sets A, B and C are individually selectable. Set A encodes characters Hex 00 … 5F. Set B encodes characters Hex 20 … 7F. Set C encodes numeric pairs 00 … 99. Switching is allowed between the code sets by sending %A, %B, or %C. FNC 1, 2, 3, and 4 are produced with %1, %2, %3, and %4. The SHIFT code, %S, allows temporary switching (for 1 character only) from set A to set B and vice versa. The
“%” character can be encoded by sending it twice.
Appendix–71
USER’S GUIDE
• When ISBN (EAN) is selected with the parameter “t130” or “T130”:
Same rules apply as for “t5” or “T5”
• When ISBN (UPC-E) is selected with the parameter “t131” or “T131”:
Same rules apply as for “t6” or “T6”
• When EAN 128 set A, set B or set C is selected with the parameter
“t132” or “T132”, “t133” or “T133” or “t134” or “T134” respectively:
Same rules apply as for “t12” or “T12”, “t13” or “T13”, or “t14” or
“T14”.
■ Box Drawing
ESC i … E (or e)
“E” or “e” is a terminator.
■ Line Block Drawing
ESC i … V (or v)
“V” or “v” is a terminator.
■ Expanded Character Data Start n = “l” or “L”
Data that follows “l” or “L” is read in as expanded character data (or labeling data). Expanded character data must end with the “ \ ” code
(5CH), which also terminates this command.
[Example Program Listings]
WIDTH "LPT1:",255
'CODE 39
LPRINT CHR$(27);"it0r1s0o0x00y00bCODE39?\";
'Interleaved 2 of 5
LPRINT CHR$(27);"it1r1s0o0x00y20b123456?\";
'FIM
LPRINT CHR$(27);"it3r1o0x00y40bA\";
'Post Net
LPRINT CHR$(27);"it4r1o0x00y60b1234567890?\";
'EAN-8
LPRINT CHR$(27);"it5r1o0x00y70b1234567?\";
Appendix–72
'UPC-A
LPRINT CHR$(27);"it5r1o0x50y70b12345678901?\";
'EAN-13
LPRINT CHR$(27);"it5r1o0x100y70b123456789012?\";
'UPC-E
LPRINT CHR$(27);"it6r1o0x150y70b0123456?\";
'Codabar
LPRINT CHR$(27);"it9r1s0o0x00y100bA123456A\";
'Code 128 set A
LPRINT CHR$(27);"it12r1o0x00y120bCODE128A12345?\";
'Code 128 set B
LPRINT CHR$(27);"it13r1o0x00y140bCODE128B12345?\";
'Code 128 set C
LPRINT CHR$(27);"it14r1o0x00y160b";CHR$(1);CHR$(2);"?\";
'ISBN(EAN)
LPRINTCHR$(27);"it130r1o0x00y180b123456789012?+12345\";
'EAN 128 set A
LPRINT CHR$(27);"it132r1o0x00y210b1234567890?\";
LPRINT CHR$(12)
END
APPENDICES
Appendix–73
INDEX
INDEX
A adjustment knob for face up/down print
advanced photoscale technology
AUTO MASK: 4-21 auto mode: 4-21
AUTO SKIP:
automatic emulation selection: 3-3
automatic interface selection:
B
bi-directional parallel
bi-directional parallel interface
bitmapped font: Appendix (printed)
C
character set: 4-27, 4-56, 4-57, 4-60,
character sets in HP-GL emulation
communications parameters: 4-18
D
duplex mode: 4-75 duplex printing: 4-75
E
error mode: 4-44 error recovery: 4-44
Index–1
USER’S GUIDE
F
face down print delivery: 3-17
face down print delivery tray: 2-3
FEEDER switch:
fixing roller:
flash memory card:
floppy disk:
font cartridge slot: 2-3 font/IC card slot: 2-3
I
IBM Proprinter XL mode:
K
L
line feed pitch: 4-25 line spacing: 4-25 lines/page: 4-25
lock your settings:
lower paper cassette:
G
H
HDD card:
high resolution control (HRC):
high speed parallel communications:
HP-GL mode:
M
manual feed:
manual feed mode:
modular input/output (MIO) interface: 5-6
N
Index–2
INDEX
O
options:
P
page protection:
paper guide:
paper jam:
paper path selector guide: 3-17
paper size: 3-12 paper source:
PCMCIA-compatible flash memory
pen setting:
PostScript® language emulation: 4-68
printer driver: 3-1 printer emulation: 3-1
Q
R
READY lamp:
resident fonts: Appendix (printed) resolution:
RS-232C serial interface connector: 2-3
S
Appendix (printed)
self-diagnosis:
single in-line memory modules
Index–3
USER’S GUIDE
switch:
T
technical reference manual: 1-10
time out for the auto interface selection:
time out for the automatic emulation
time out for the power save mode: 4-69
toner cartridge: 1-4, 2-2, 2-7, 6-1
toner empty:
toner low:
toner save mode:
top cover:
transfer roller:
tray 1:
U
W
Windows:
X
X offset:
Y
Index–4
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project
Related manuals
advertisement